25.10.2013 Views

Press Freedom and Globalisation - International Press Institute

Press Freedom and Globalisation - International Press Institute

Press Freedom and Globalisation - International Press Institute

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

<strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>Globalisation</strong>:<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />

Compared<br />

By<br />

Jens Barl<strong>and</strong><br />

A thesis submitted to fulfill the degree of<br />

Masters of Arts in <strong>International</strong> Relations<br />

United States <strong>International</strong> University – Africa<br />

Nairobi, Kenya<br />

May 2005<br />

i


Declaration<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

I hereby declare that this thesis is my own original work. It has not been published or<br />

presented in any other institution. All material obtained from other sources is cited.<br />

…………………………………………………………….. … ………………………<br />

Jens Barl<strong>and</strong> Date<br />

Supervisor<br />

I hereby declare that this thesis has been presented for examination with my approval as<br />

the appointed supervisor.<br />

…………………………………………………………….. … ………………………<br />

Professor Macharia Munene Date<br />

The Dean, School of Arts <strong>and</strong> Science<br />

I hereby endorse this thesis document subject to all the University requirements.<br />

…………………………………………………………….. … ………………………<br />

Professor Ruthie C. Rono Date<br />

Vice-Chancellor, United States <strong>International</strong> University – Africa<br />

…………………………………………………………….. … ………………………<br />

Professor Freida A. Brown Date<br />

ii


Content<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Abstract ............................................................................................................ 1<br />

Chapter 1: Introduction ................................................................................. 2<br />

Background <strong>and</strong> Problem Statement..........................................................................2<br />

Hypothesis..................................................................................................................4<br />

Objectives...................................................................................................................4<br />

Literature Review.......................................................................................................4<br />

Theoretical Frameworks ..........................................................................................14<br />

Definition <strong>and</strong> Examination of the Concept ‘<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>’ .................................15<br />

Methodology ............................................................................................................20<br />

Chapter 2: <strong>Globalisation</strong> of the Mass Media.............................................. 21<br />

The Economic <strong>Globalisation</strong>....................................................................................21<br />

Milestones in the History of <strong>Globalisation</strong> ..................................................21<br />

The Forces Behind the <strong>Globalisation</strong> Processes ..........................................24<br />

Mass Media Involvement in <strong>Globalisation</strong> ..............................................................26<br />

How Mass Media Came to be a Globalised Industry...................................27<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> Spread of Democracy ...................................................31<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> as a Universal Concept....................................................................38<br />

<strong>International</strong> Regimes on Global <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>.........................................38<br />

Debates on Global <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> ...............................................................45<br />

Chapter 3: <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia ................................................. 58<br />

The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian Context .......................................................................................58<br />

Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>.............................................................................58<br />

Reasons for <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> ..........................................................................62<br />

Mass Media in the Societies.........................................................................64<br />

Four Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia.......................................................65<br />

Role of the <strong>Press</strong>...........................................................................................66<br />

Gathering Information..................................................................................69<br />

Publishing.....................................................................................................73<br />

Protection of Journalistic Activities .............................................................76<br />

i


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Chapter 4: <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in East Africa................................................... 80<br />

The East African Context.........................................................................................80<br />

Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>.............................................................................80<br />

Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> .....................................................................90<br />

Mass Media in the Societies.........................................................................96<br />

Four Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in East Africa ........................................................98<br />

Role of the <strong>Press</strong>...........................................................................................98<br />

Gathering Information................................................................................100<br />

Publishing...................................................................................................103<br />

Protection of Journalistic Activities ...........................................................107<br />

Chapter 5: Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa Compared............................... 111<br />

Contexts <strong>and</strong> Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>................................................................111<br />

Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>...........................................................................111<br />

Reasons for <strong>and</strong> Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> ........................................112<br />

Mass Media in the Societies.......................................................................112<br />

The Aspect of the <strong>Press</strong>’ Role....................................................................114<br />

The Aspect of Gathering Information ........................................................115<br />

The Aspect of Publishing ...........................................................................115<br />

The Aspect of Protection of Journalistic Activities ...................................116<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Interactions Between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa.......................117<br />

Direct Links Between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa ..................................117<br />

Relations to Global Regimes of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>.........................................119<br />

Chapter 6: Conclusion ................................................................................ 122<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa ........................122<br />

Bibliography <strong>and</strong> Sources........................................................................... 129<br />

© Copyright: USIU, Kenya <strong>and</strong> Jens Barl<strong>and</strong>, Norway (jens@start.no)<br />

ii


Abstract<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

<strong>Press</strong> freedom is what enables democracies to work. A free press is supposed to maximise<br />

political, social <strong>and</strong> cultural outcomes for citizens in a society. Democracy is commonly<br />

accepted as the global st<strong>and</strong>ard of good governance. Hence, globalisation spreads<br />

democracy including press freedom.<br />

This thesis examines what effects such a spread has on press freedom. Further,<br />

forces involved with globalisation has interests in how press freedom is formulated,<br />

interpreted <strong>and</strong> practised. The thesis elaborates on how these forces promote, spread <strong>and</strong><br />

even manipulate press freedom.<br />

In global communication there is a great gap between North <strong>and</strong> South. Global<br />

media in the North also perform a dominance over South. An effect is how global media<br />

are spreading Western values. Such perspectives are major issues in this thesis which gives<br />

attention to the two regions of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia is in the main-<br />

stream of Western democracies <strong>and</strong> ranks at the top level of press freedom globally. East<br />

Africa attempts to join democratisation processes conducted by globalisation. <strong>Press</strong> free-<br />

dom in East Africa is in a period of change between authoritarian systems <strong>and</strong> democracy.<br />

A globalisation perspective on press freedom calls attention to how different forces<br />

use or misuse press freedom in a global struggle for power.<br />

Constructivism theory is employed. That one focus on roles of regimes, agents <strong>and</strong><br />

circumstances. Then the following questions arise: Who or what rule global press<br />

freedom? Who or what spread press freedom globally? Which underlying forces support<br />

good conditions for global press freedom?<br />

<strong>Press</strong> freedom is only one among many concepts used in globalisation. However,<br />

the study of how these forces interact with press freedom illustrates the great game of<br />

globalisation.<br />

1


Chapter 1: Introduction<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

This thesis examines the spread of press freedom in the context of globalisation. The first<br />

chapter gives introduction to the issue, the core literature is reviewed, <strong>and</strong> theoretical<br />

framework, the concept of press freedom <strong>and</strong> methodology are clarified. Chapter two will<br />

analyse globalisation <strong>and</strong> how mass media <strong>and</strong> press freedom are involved in this process.<br />

Then, chapters three <strong>and</strong> four will be on press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries <strong>and</strong> East<br />

Africa. Chapter five will compare practices in the two regions. Chapter six will be the<br />

conclusion.<br />

Background <strong>and</strong> Problem Statement<br />

The globalisation process brings the whole world’s population into the same house, <strong>and</strong><br />

everyone is more or less influenced by <strong>and</strong> linked to each other. The globalisation process<br />

covers a huge agenda from environment, trade, peace <strong>and</strong> war as well as human rights,<br />

health, communication, culture, <strong>and</strong> football.<br />

For poor countries, democratisation has emerged as a governance issue, <strong>and</strong> with<br />

democratisation is the question of press freedom. <strong>Press</strong> freedom is considered to be a<br />

vehicle <strong>and</strong> agent which contributes to the spread of democracy.<br />

In a democracy the government is supposed to serve its people <strong>and</strong> is expected to<br />

carry out what is the common good for citizens. 1 To ensure authorities do what is expected,<br />

an educated <strong>and</strong> well-informed population is necessary to dem<strong>and</strong> transparency in<br />

1 Jackson, Robert H., “The evolution of international society” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The<br />

Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to international relations (Oxford: Oxford University<br />

<strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 38-44; <strong>and</strong> Philip’s, Philip’s Encyclopedia : comprehensive edition (London: Philip’s,<br />

2002), pp. 105-106 <strong>and</strong> 601.<br />

2


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

powerful institutions. In this regard, the mass media play the role of providing the needed<br />

flow of information. 2<br />

In Western democracies, the mass media have developed to enable the flow of<br />

information necessary for popular rule. These democracies <strong>and</strong> their mass media are<br />

intertwined. 3 However, the mass media need freedom to play such a role. From this point<br />

of view, the mass media’s m<strong>and</strong>ate is derived from the people, not from authorities. The<br />

ideal is that the mass media would then ensure that the authorities always serve people <strong>and</strong><br />

not any other goals. 4<br />

The focus of attention is on two regions <strong>and</strong> two countries; Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia as<br />

represented by Norway, <strong>and</strong> East Africa as represented by Kenya. These are quite different<br />

from each other, yet, the regions are connected to each other. Norway <strong>and</strong> Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia are<br />

considered to rank at the top of press freedom <strong>and</strong> are among those that spearhead further<br />

development of democratic instruments. 5 The East African countries are not at the bottom<br />

level of press freedom. However, these are still among poor countries where press freedom<br />

needs to be improved. 6 Additionally, press freedoms in those regions are interconnected<br />

because the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries link their aid politics to press freedom. 7 Due to the<br />

attention to Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa, a North-South perspective will be emphasised in<br />

this study.<br />

2<br />

Stiglitz, Joseph, “Transparency in Government” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass<br />

Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp.<br />

27-29 <strong>and</strong> 32-34.<br />

3<br />

Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony, “The Media in Democratic <strong>and</strong> Nondemocratic Regimes: A<br />

Multilevel Perspective” in Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony (eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A<br />

Comparative Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp. 1-3, Altschull, J. Herbert,<br />

From Milton to McLuhan : The Ideas Behind American Journalism (New York: Longman, 1990), pp. 1-6.<br />

4<br />

Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, pp. 27-43.<br />

5<br />

Herbert, John, Practising Global Journalism : exploring reporting issues worldwide (Oxford: Focal <strong>Press</strong>,<br />

2001), pp. 69 <strong>and</strong> 88.<br />

6<br />

Merrill, John C., Global Journalism : Survey of <strong>International</strong> Communication : third edition (New York:<br />

Longman Publishers, 1994), p. 71; <strong>and</strong> <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003 : World <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Freedom</strong> Review (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003), pp. 27, 48 <strong>and</strong> 50.<br />

7<br />

Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, St.prp. nr. 1 : (2003-2004) : for budsjetterminen 2004 : Utenriksdepartementet<br />

(Oslo: Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 2003), pp. 91-92 <strong>and</strong> 137; <strong>and</strong> Bourgault, Louise M., Mass Media in<br />

Sub-Saharan Africa (Indianapolis: Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1995), p. 128.<br />

3


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Democracy as an instrument for good governance is not only based on constitut-<br />

ions, but also on law <strong>and</strong> order. Culture is another crucial element in the development of<br />

such a rule. Furthermore, if a democratic institution is copied from one country to another,<br />

it would probably work differently due to odd cultural conditions. 8 The spread of press<br />

freedom as an element in democratisation processes raises the question of what press<br />

freedom means <strong>and</strong> in what context. The problem that arises is whether the concept of<br />

press freedom can be transplanted from one country to another when the political <strong>and</strong><br />

cultural circumstances are different.<br />

Hypothesis<br />

While press freedom can be a universal concept, there are differences in the practice of<br />

press freedom.<br />

Objectives<br />

To provide underst<strong>and</strong>ing of press freedom as a global concept.<br />

To establish underst<strong>and</strong>ing of the globalisation context as well as the concept of press<br />

freedom.<br />

To describe the practice of press freedom in two different regions, <strong>and</strong> then to compare<br />

these.<br />

To give a balanced description of press freedom in the context of globalisation.<br />

Literature Review<br />

A number of books deal with globalisation. Among them is The Globalization of World<br />

Politics : An introduction to international relations, edited by John Baylis <strong>and</strong> Steve Smith.<br />

8 Getecha, Ciru, “Audit Public Leadership as a Way of Combating Graft”, paper presented at the ‘Eastern<br />

Africa <strong>International</strong> Conference on Media Fighting Corruption’, at United States <strong>International</strong> University<br />

(USIU), Nairobi, 30 th -31 st March, 2004, pp. 4-7.<br />

4


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

It gives a fundamental underst<strong>and</strong>ing of global history, development of <strong>International</strong><br />

Relations theories, <strong>and</strong> several global issues. While the book is relatively broad range, it<br />

lacks critical approaches to globalisation processes <strong>and</strong> offers little on mass media as a<br />

global force.<br />

Andrew Williams’ book Failed imagination? : New world orders of the twentieth<br />

century presents different political actors’ agenda that were behind globalisation in the 20 th<br />

century. Its strength is in the underst<strong>and</strong>ing of how American interests have used global<br />

politics to develop a new world order that supports their own interests. American concepts<br />

such as open doors, free trade <strong>and</strong> democracy are introduced as good global concepts.<br />

Williams describes global politics as competing interests <strong>and</strong> not as fair play. He writes<br />

almost nothing about mass media’s role.<br />

Even more critical in approach to the globalisation processes is Richard Falk in his<br />

Predatory Globalization : A Critique. He paints a picture, from the bottom, of how<br />

globalisation’s adverse side strikes those who already were poor <strong>and</strong> weak. He predicts<br />

global instability <strong>and</strong> urges for global governance through a reformed United Nations.<br />

A much referred to philosopher for a critical <strong>and</strong> alternative approach towards<br />

globalisation is Immanuel Wallerstein. He gives a brief introduction to his thought in the<br />

chapter “The inter-state structure of the modern world-system” in the book <strong>International</strong><br />

theory: positivism <strong>and</strong> beyond edited by Steve Smith, Ken Booth <strong>and</strong> Marysia Zalewski.<br />

Derived from Marxism <strong>and</strong> Leninism, he describes the world as core, semi-periphery <strong>and</strong><br />

periphery. Accodring to Wallerstein’s theory, the actual world order is constructed to<br />

collect values for the capitalists in the core areas.<br />

Opposite to the critical approaches above, the World Bank’s report Globalization,<br />

Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty : Building an Inclusive World Economy presents globalisation from<br />

the dominant actors’ point of view. It gives a lot of facts <strong>and</strong> attention to poverty <strong>and</strong><br />

development as well as to global trade.<br />

5


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Some books specifically deal with globalisation <strong>and</strong> the mass media. Edward S.<br />

Herman <strong>and</strong> Robert W. McChesney’s book The Global Media : The New Missionaries of<br />

Corporate Capitalism has two contributions. They describe the history of globalisation of<br />

mass media from simple newspapers to a global <strong>and</strong> extensive industry. An interesting<br />

aspect is how global radio has been used in ideological warfare, especially during the Cold<br />

War. Further, the book describes how media business <strong>and</strong> all other global businesses are<br />

intertwined. The book hardly covers media’s social responsibility, <strong>and</strong> has the view that all<br />

mass media are purely capitalistic actors.<br />

Lynne Joyrich’s Re-Viewing Reception : Television, Gender, <strong>and</strong> Postmodern<br />

Culture is on post-modern theories. In her opinion, TV introduces its audience to a world<br />

of dreams where they become perfect consumers. The mass media are both agents for <strong>and</strong><br />

advertising channels for commodities. TV is supposed to “drug” its audience into losing<br />

critical capacity <strong>and</strong> being made passive. Her perspective is that of powerful companies<br />

<strong>and</strong> interests using the media as agents for business.<br />

John C. Merrill has edited Global Journalism : Survey of <strong>International</strong><br />

Communication that considers journalism as a global phenomenon. He describes how<br />

media are different around the world, <strong>and</strong> challenges journalists who operate in a<br />

globalised profession. One of his chapters is about press freedom around the world. His<br />

survey describes all the world’s regions in details <strong>and</strong> the book contains a lot of facts.<br />

However, globalisation process is taken for granted <strong>and</strong> the book does not challenge what<br />

the media’s role as global actors is supposed to be.<br />

John Herbert’s book Practising Global Journalism : exploring reporting issues<br />

worldwide provides discussions on different aspect of press freedom. These include the<br />

government perspective as well as freedom according to media’s own market-driven<br />

approach. The book points out how competition within the media business creates new<br />

threats to press freedom, not from governments but from commercial forces.<br />

6


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

The book News Culture by Stuart Allan deals with how a culture which determines<br />

news came up. He describes how a professional culture developed to become crucial to<br />

determine what is included or excluded from media’s coverage. Allan’s book is useful for<br />

journalists to think critically about their own professionalism.<br />

The book, The Globalization of News, edited by Oliver Boyd-Barrett <strong>and</strong> Terhi<br />

Rantanen, presents different views on global journalism <strong>and</strong> global culture. Most of all, the<br />

book gives attention to the dominant news agencies’ role in the globalisation process. The<br />

book has a broad perspective, where the news media are considered as agents for transfor-<br />

mation. Among the case studies, is the chapter on “From State Socialism to Deregulation”<br />

from Tanzania.<br />

The aspect of global patterns of dominance <strong>and</strong> subordination, is the major concern<br />

in George Gerbner, Hamid Mowlana <strong>and</strong> Kaarle Nordenstreng’s The Global Media Debate<br />

: Its Rise, Fall, <strong>and</strong> Renewal. During the 1970s UNESCO became the arena for the debate<br />

on a New World Information <strong>and</strong> Communication Order (NWICO), where poor countries<br />

confronted the rich world. Media’s role as a supporter of the world order, where the rich<br />

countries are superior, was the core of the debate, which the book describes. This is an<br />

important aspect about mass media <strong>and</strong> globalisation.<br />

The report Globalization of the Mass Media, published by the U.S. Department of<br />

Commerce, demonstrates most of all how global spreading of American media is a<br />

declared policy. The aim is stated to be to spread American businesses <strong>and</strong> American<br />

values. The important thing is that this report unveils pure American interests in<br />

globalisation, <strong>and</strong> the use of mass media.<br />

Concerning mass media ideology, J. Herbert Altschull’s From Milton to McLuhan :<br />

The Ideas Behind American Journalism gives the philosophical history of mass media<br />

growth in the West. The place of origin for the mass media was Europe. In the Anglo-<br />

American world in the 17 th <strong>and</strong> 18 th century philosophers such as John Milton, Thomas<br />

7


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Hobbes, John Locke, <strong>and</strong> David Hume were among those who influenced thinking about<br />

newspapers’ functions <strong>and</strong> effects in the society. In contemporary France, the great<br />

philosophers Montesquieu, Voltaire <strong>and</strong> Rousseau gave significant contributions. Those<br />

English <strong>and</strong> French philosophies merged in the founding of the new American constitution<br />

in 1787 <strong>and</strong> influenced development of the American concept of democracy, self-image<br />

<strong>and</strong> perception of the world. Underst<strong>and</strong>ing of present American mind of media <strong>and</strong><br />

democracy is provided by Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media edited by Richard Gunther <strong>and</strong><br />

Anthony Mughan. Due to the American hegemon status in forming a global culture<br />

through mass media, Exploring Media Culture by Michael R. Real completes this aspect.<br />

An African perspective is given by Johan Retief in Media Ethics : An Introduction<br />

to Responsible Journalism. The book focuses on concrete ethical cases, <strong>and</strong> is written by a<br />

South African scholar for African journalism students. Although press freedom is not<br />

discussed in particular, it emerges frequently as an underlying principle.<br />

A number of books discuss global mass media’s role as Africa’s image builder.<br />

Among these is Africa’s Media Image, edited by Beverly G. Hawk. The interaction<br />

between global media <strong>and</strong> African domestic policy as well as foreign policy are discussed.<br />

The case studies cover a wide time frame from “The Media <strong>and</strong> the Mau Mau” during<br />

Kenya’s struggle for independence, the Cold War, <strong>and</strong> even to current covering of<br />

emergencies. Another case study is the book Imaging the Congo : the international<br />

relations of identity, written by Kevin C. Dunn. The book is not only about media, but how<br />

the concept of identity is of growing concern within the field of <strong>International</strong> Relations. He<br />

labels Congo as ‘symbol of contemporary Africa’. He argues how Western stereotypes <strong>and</strong><br />

images of Congo <strong>and</strong> Congolese through their mass media have been demeaning to the<br />

country. Within the same perspective is Graham Mytton’s book Mass Communication in<br />

Africa. In particular his fourth chapter “Communication <strong>and</strong> Political Power” describes this<br />

thinking from political circles. He elaborates how strategies on mass media are included in<br />

8


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

the power politics, both by the colonial masters as well as the African rulers after<br />

independence.<br />

The World Bank is, among others, the chief agent for the globalisation process.<br />

During recent years press freedom has been included in the World Bank’s policy for<br />

development, democratisation <strong>and</strong> globalisation. An extensive political background for its<br />

policy is described in the book The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />

Development, edited <strong>and</strong> published by The World Bank <strong>Institute</strong>. Most of all, the book<br />

discusses how to include the Third World <strong>and</strong> new democracies after the Cold War into the<br />

political systems built in the Western world. However, this book is more about politics<br />

than about journalism but it is useful in the way it looks at the media through both political<br />

<strong>and</strong> commercial lenses.<br />

However, the idea of press freedom crashes into other interests. William Miller has<br />

edited the book Alternatives to <strong>Freedom</strong> : arguments <strong>and</strong> opinions where such perspectives<br />

are described. The essays examine press freedom as opposed to parliamentary sovereignty,<br />

national interests, responsibility, accountability, equality, <strong>and</strong> the moral community. The<br />

book shows that there are many things to consider other than press freedom, takes<br />

democracy as a given, <strong>and</strong> the basic value of press freedom is not challenged. Some aspect<br />

around how the press <strong>and</strong> its role has changed through the history are given by Mitchell<br />

Stephens in his A History of News. The book is about news as a genre, but his chapter<br />

about newspapers <strong>and</strong> revolutions is enlightening.<br />

There are several international bodies promoting press freedom even if the<br />

underst<strong>and</strong>ing of the concept may be variable. From the beginning UNESCO has been an<br />

important actor. Another is <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> (IPI) which was founded partly as a<br />

result of processes within UNESCO, <strong>and</strong> connected to the World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

Committee. IPI has published its own history of promoting press freedom which gives the<br />

aspect seen from the inside of an international organisation. Three books, a pamphlet <strong>and</strong> a<br />

9


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

report cover the years from late 1940s to 2003: IPI – The First Ten Years, IPI: The<br />

Undivided Word : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> : Part I: 1951-1976; IPI:<br />

The Defence of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> : Part II:<br />

1976-1988; 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna (covers 1993-2002); <strong>and</strong> IPI Report 2003<br />

: World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Review.<br />

Further, books about Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian or Norwegian concept of press freedom can be<br />

represented by Den redigerende makt : Redaktørrollens norske historie (in English: The<br />

editing power : History of the Editor’s Role in Norway) written by Martin Eide. This is a<br />

history book on how the editor’s role as an institution developed in Norway. The book<br />

looks at the editor as a defender of press freedom, <strong>and</strong> discusses various threats to such a<br />

free <strong>and</strong> powerful role. Numerous references to Sweden <strong>and</strong> Denmark make the book ade-<br />

quate as a source for press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. A weakness of this book is the impres-<br />

sion that the editor’s freedom is limited to freedom from government control, the owners’<br />

interference in editorial affairs, <strong>and</strong> some other forces which want to control the news. It<br />

does not discuss the possibility of being puppet of global cultural or ideological interests.<br />

Another Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian contribution is Kyrre Eggen’s Ytringsfrihet (in English:<br />

<strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression). The book covers almost every question about the right of free<br />

speech included debates where freedom of expression is in conflict with other interests.<br />

This book too, has many references to Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia as well as practices of free speech in a<br />

European legal context. However, the philosophical basis for such a democratic freedom in<br />

itself is not discussed very much. The author’s reason for that choice is that it is a book<br />

based on law, not the history of ideas.<br />

A global aspect from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia is given by the book Utviklingshjelp, utenriks-<br />

politikk og makt (in English: Development Aid, Foreign Politics, <strong>and</strong> Power) written by<br />

Terje Tvedt. The book is a result of a subproject in a Norwegian study of power <strong>and</strong> demo-<br />

cracy. One of his descriptions is how mass media as an actor is included in the Norwegian<br />

10


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

development aid policy. The book does not get into the core of press freedom, yet, media’s<br />

role in the interaction between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> Africa is exposed.<br />

Then, books presenting the African or Kenyan concept of press freedom is repre-<br />

sented by Louise M. Bourgault in her Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa. This book gives<br />

a broad <strong>and</strong> extensive underst<strong>and</strong>ing of mass media in Africa. The historical <strong>and</strong> cultural<br />

background are described <strong>and</strong> Kenya is covered through different cases. A valuable<br />

chapter is the one which discusses press freedom according to the African oral tradition<br />

<strong>and</strong> discourse style. Due to changes in African countries, democracies <strong>and</strong> mass media, her<br />

writing is not up to date. Towards <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> collects contributions from a round-table<br />

conference in Zimbabwe in 1996 about press freedom in Africa. Several of the participants<br />

give papers at the core of North-South matters of press freedom.<br />

A relatively simple textbook is Law <strong>and</strong> Ethics of the Media : Media Training in<br />

Africa written by André Linard. The book is meant generally for the whole of Africa. The<br />

concept of press freedom is discussed according to ethics as well as legal limits. The book<br />

is a basic introduction, a good one indeed, yet without any deep background.<br />

Another book which has a practical approach is the H<strong>and</strong>book for African Journa-<br />

lists : With Leaders in African Journalism, edited by Malcolm F. Mallette. It is a simple<br />

<strong>and</strong> practical book. The book’s starting point is a consideration of the role of a free press<br />

which is a given condition for all the journalistic practice.<br />

A short, although important text, is Tom Mboya’s address to the IPI’s global confe-<br />

rence in Paris, 1962, on “Relations Between <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> Governments in Africa”, included in<br />

his book The Challenge of Nationhood : A collection of speeches <strong>and</strong> writings. At that<br />

time of liberation, he pointed out the importance of an ‘Africanised’ press. His opinions<br />

were similar to those which arose during the NWICO debate. His views were influential on<br />

thoughts on <strong>and</strong> within the Kenyan press.<br />

11


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Philip Ochieng in I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong> : An Insider’s View of the Media <strong>and</strong> Politics<br />

in Africa, accuses his colleagues within the Kenyan press, of joining the Western press’<br />

subjugating approach to Africa. In his opinion, Western commercial interests are a more<br />

serious threat to the freedom of the African press than bad governments. He contributes to<br />

this debate with radical <strong>and</strong> anti-mainstream reasoning. The book covers Kenya, Tanzania<br />

<strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a. Still in East Africa, there are three similar books which are oriented towards<br />

facts about media <strong>and</strong> press freedom in these countries. These are The State of the Media<br />

in Ug<strong>and</strong>a edited by Rose Mary Kemigisha, A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in<br />

Tanzania edited by Lawrence Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Joseph Mapunda as well as the more<br />

extensive Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya edited by Mitch Odero <strong>and</strong> Esther<br />

Kamweru. These three books are all sponsored by Friedrich Ebert Stiftung.<br />

Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs, edited by Charles Okigbo, portrays ideals of<br />

African social journalism. Distinctions of ‘African’ emerge compared with a traditional<br />

Western approach, for instance concerning the declared ideal of objectivity. The editor<br />

argues that in Africa journalism practice <strong>and</strong> political decisions are not completely<br />

divorced. The book is a broad <strong>and</strong> practical textbook about political journalism. Many<br />

books on journalism are written in the West. Therefore, this book’s major contribution is<br />

its African based content.<br />

Another core text is Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the<br />

Third World, edited by Michael Kunczik. His question to the whole debate on media ethics<br />

is: <strong>Freedom</strong> of the press – where to draw the line? Further, he discusses tensions around<br />

Western developed values in an African context. In particular the chapter “Anglophone<br />

Africa: Journalists – puppets of the proprietors?”, written by Joe Kadhi, elaborates on the<br />

space of press freedom within the reality of an African society <strong>and</strong> ethics in journalism.<br />

The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya by John Baptist Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Absalom Aggrey<br />

Mutere gives the picture of the development of the Kenyan press, since its origin among<br />

12


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

white settlers <strong>and</strong> missionaires in 1895. The book covers emerging <strong>and</strong> foundations of the<br />

media organs as well as political forces, which constituted the environment. The book,<br />

which was issued in 1988, includes broader perspectives too, as press freedom, press<br />

organisations <strong>and</strong> matters on communication structure.<br />

Another history book is Britain’s Gulag : The Brutal End of Empire in Kenya<br />

recently written by Caroline Elkins. Of interest for this thesis is her descriptions on how<br />

the British colonial rule in Kenya manipulated media to be propag<strong>and</strong>a tools. Instruments<br />

established by the British have even had impact on Kenyan press freedom after<br />

independence.<br />

Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society is edited by Jerry Domatob, Abubakar Jika<br />

<strong>and</strong> Ikechukwu Nwosu. Their testimonials to leaders of the liberated African countries are<br />

harsh. Media were not liberalised when these leaders continued as the colonial rulers. In<br />

addition, strong Western media’s influence on political dynamics in Africa, related to the<br />

NWICO debate, is well covered as well. Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa is edited by<br />

Göran Hydén, Michael Leslie <strong>and</strong> Folu F. Ogundimu. This is a relatively up to date book<br />

about the role of media in democratisation in Sub-Saharan Africa. The book’s perspectives<br />

are multi-diciplinary. It provides examinations of democratisation in Africa within<br />

different contexts as History, Political, Technological, Economic <strong>and</strong> Cultural.<br />

A new book on Kenya is Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice : The Kenyan Jurisprudence<br />

edited by David Makali <strong>and</strong> published on behalf of The Media <strong>Institute</strong>. The detailed book<br />

has most of all a juridical approach to press freedom. From this point of view the texts<br />

contributes both in historical <strong>and</strong> political perspectives with a description of press freedom<br />

<strong>and</strong> the freedom of expression in Kenya. Several key judgements are surveyed.<br />

13


Theoretical Frameworks<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

There are two theoretical frameworks used in this thesis; one within the realm of Inter-<br />

national Relations, <strong>and</strong> another theory which is specific to the press’ role in societies.<br />

Within <strong>International</strong> Relations theories, the field of international institutionalisation<br />

seems to be able to explain the phenomenon of press freedom in the perspective of globali-<br />

sation. Robert O. Keohane <strong>and</strong> Joseph S. Nye Jr. edited Transnational <strong>and</strong> World Politics<br />

in 1970, whose major concern was to describe a complex pattern of world politics.<br />

Keohane <strong>and</strong> Nye took a liberal st<strong>and</strong> where they emphasise all non-state actors. They<br />

gave a theoretical framework which is labelled liberal institutionalism, a branch within<br />

neo-liberalism. They presented a variety of possible international actors, both connected to<br />

governments <strong>and</strong> nongovernmental, as well as actors who are superior to states. Their<br />

framework provides underst<strong>and</strong>ing of global forces independent of the states’ role.<br />

John Gerard Ruggie, in his book Constructing the World Polity : Essays on inter-<br />

national institutionalization, first published in 1998, claims neo-liberals such as Keohane<br />

<strong>and</strong> Nye, <strong>and</strong> neo-realists such as Kenneth Waltz, have merged into the mainstream which<br />

he labels ‘neo-utilitarianism’, whose weaknesses are the limits of positivism. He describes<br />

how he, as a constructivist, is able to use something from the mainstream, but mix it with<br />

elements from the classical tradition of Emily Durkheim <strong>and</strong> Max Weber. He puts himself<br />

into a category called neo-classical constructivism.<br />

What makes sense between Ruggie’s constructivism <strong>and</strong> press freedom, is the<br />

complexity of global actors <strong>and</strong> forces, <strong>and</strong> especially the notion of agents. Those are not<br />

limited to the organisations even if organisations can be agents. ‘Regime’, ‘agency’, <strong>and</strong><br />

‘circumstances’ are among the key concepts in constructivism. The common approach to<br />

press freedom in literature is functional as, for instance, such as absence of governmental<br />

interventions in the press’ affairs. <strong>Press</strong> freedom can be considered to be such an agent<br />

14


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

because of its capability to establish circumstances for democracy. This democratisation is<br />

a part of the globalisation process.<br />

Within theories about the media, the book Four Theories of the <strong>Press</strong> by Fred S.<br />

Siebert, Theodore Peterson, <strong>and</strong> Wilbur Schramm published in 1956 is a classic. They<br />

categorised media’s role in four different political systems: First, in authoritarian systems<br />

the media have to serve the central authority. Second, in libertarian systems the individual<br />

rights are the most important interest for the media to serve. Third, in social responsibility<br />

systems media need to serve both individual <strong>and</strong> society. Fourth, in communist or totalitar-<br />

ian systems, the media have to serve the needs of society as interpreted by the Communist<br />

party. Several other views have emerged out of debates on these classical models. Ray<br />

Eldon Hiebert <strong>and</strong> Sheila Jean Gibbons’ book Exploring Mass Media for a Changing<br />

World added a fifth model: the the capitalistic system where media purely exist to make<br />

profit for their owners.<br />

These five different media systems constitute a theoretical framework which this<br />

thesis will use on media’s role in the sosiety. Below, it is pointed out how the three<br />

systems of libertarian, social responsibility <strong>and</strong> capitalism influence the dominant global<br />

media.<br />

Definition <strong>and</strong> Examination of the Concept ‘<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>’<br />

A typical definition of ‘press freedom’ in text books has a functional approach, for instance<br />

such as: “the mass media’s unquestionable right to discuss whatever is not explicitly<br />

forbidden by law, including the wisdom of any restrictive statute”. 9 The emphasised aspect<br />

is the press’ independence of intereference from any external interests. The attention is<br />

most of all given to how political authorities give the press space <strong>and</strong> freedom to play its<br />

9<br />

Among many examples, this one is quoted from: Ahuja, B. N., Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism (Delhi:<br />

Surjeet Publications, 2004), p. 4.<br />

15


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

autonomous role. An alternative approach is to emphasise press freedom as a regime, for<br />

instance as: “[…] This regime presupposes that information resources are significantly<br />

independent of political or economic powers…” 10<br />

The English pilosopher of the Enlightenment, John Locke, is among the most<br />

influental contributors to freedom thinking in Western democracies. In his contract theory,<br />

government need support from the governed. In addition, people have the right of<br />

revolution, even a duty to rise up against tyrants. These two assumptions have been the<br />

basis for civil rights such as freedom to say, print <strong>and</strong> publish opinions <strong>and</strong> beliefs. 11<br />

Search for truth was at the core in early philosophy about the press. The German<br />

printer John Peter Zenger, an immigrant to the United States, was in 1735 found not guilty<br />

in a case on seditious libel. The defense was that what he had written, was the truth. This<br />

was the start of the ideology where truth is given as reason for press freedom. The event is<br />

also celebrated as the origin of the watchdog principle. 12<br />

Despite honourable phrases, definitions <strong>and</strong> practices of press freedom have been<br />

flexible. The legal origin <strong>and</strong> the best conditions for a free press is often credited to be in<br />

the First Amendment of the Constitution of the United States in 1791 which states:<br />

“Congress shall make no law … abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press”. 13 This<br />

doctrine which ‘no law is the best law’ is in accordance with American liberalism where<br />

the ideal is a minimised state beyond serving individual freedom, order <strong>and</strong> security. The<br />

historical contrast was the Constitution of the Soviet Union which also guaranteed freedom<br />

10<br />

Linard, André, Law <strong>and</strong> Ethics of the Media : Media Training in Africa (Nairobi: Paulines Publications,<br />

2002), p. 132.<br />

11<br />

Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 49-52.<br />

12<br />

Ibid., pp. 109-110.<br />

13<br />

Patterson, Thomas E., “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society” in Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong><br />

Mughan, Anthony (eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A Comparative Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge<br />

University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), p. 242.<br />

16


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

of the press. However, what the Soviets meant was freedom from capital, careerism, <strong>and</strong><br />

bourgeois archaic individualism. 14<br />

Another early influential thinker on press freedom is John Stuart Mill. His “Essay<br />

on Liberty” in 1859 has been credited as one of the founding documents of the liberalism.<br />

Mill was concerned with plurality, including the right to be wrong <strong>and</strong> make mistakes. The<br />

many sides of truth was among his reasons for need of free expression. He described that<br />

right as one of the most sacred. 15 Mill is much referred in Western as well as in African<br />

writings which indicate his global impact on the notion of press freedom. 16<br />

A twin concept of press freedom is ‘freedom of expression’ which is a cornerstone<br />

in democracy. The concepts press freedom <strong>and</strong> freedom of expression seem to overlap<br />

almost completely. Many text books mix these without clear distinctions but press freedom<br />

is among the means or conditions for a satisfactory working freedom of expression. Hence,<br />

these concepts are two sides of the same issue. 17<br />

In terms of democracy, a major point is that press freedom belongs to the public,<br />

not to the media corporates. If information is a public good, a necessity for democratic<br />

processes, the purpose for press freedom is that the press should get conditions to serve the<br />

public. 18<br />

A legal description of press freedom gives attention to four aspects of press free-<br />

dom. The case studies from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa will be organised in accordance to<br />

this classification. One aspect is content-neutral regulations arrangements. These influence<br />

the media indirectly, for instance, subsidies, customs, taxation, as well as anticompetition<br />

14<br />

Siebert, Peterson <strong>and</strong> Schramm, Four Theories of the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 125-126.<br />

15<br />

Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 161-172.<br />

16<br />

Ogbondah, Chris W., “Media Laws in Political Transition” in Hydén, Göran, Leslie, Michael <strong>and</strong><br />

Ogundimu, Folu F., Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction Publishers, 2002), p. 58;<br />

<strong>and</strong> Makali, David (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice : The Kenyan Jurisprudence (Nairobi: Phoenix<br />

Publishers, 2003), p. 25.<br />

17<br />

Krug, Peter <strong>and</strong> Price, Monroe E., “The Legal Environment for News Media” in World Bank, The Right<br />

To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI<br />

Development Studies, 2002), p. 195.<br />

18<br />

Ibid., p. 194.<br />

17


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

laws. Those instruments may incite or obstruct a country’s mass media due to political<br />

preferences, <strong>and</strong> decide the scope of media’s role in that society. Another aspect is<br />

news gathering. That is about the media’s right to access information, <strong>and</strong> exceptions, the<br />

media’s criminal <strong>and</strong> administrative liability, relations with <strong>and</strong> protection of confidential<br />

sources as well as selection systems in licensing of journalists. The next aspect is about<br />

content-based regulations which cover the media’s right to publish <strong>and</strong> to decide over its<br />

own content. That right is not absolute. Different kinds of protections are established to<br />

protect other interests such as the state’s collective concerns as well as other private <strong>and</strong><br />

individual interests. Many competing freedoms in this area have to be regulated even in a<br />

liberal society. Finally, an aspect is about protection of journalistic activity. It may include<br />

‘internal press freedom’ which means arrangements that control the relations between<br />

media owners <strong>and</strong> their editorial staff. Towards authorities it is whether journalistic<br />

activities are offered privileges which function as protection, or opposite; harassment of<br />

journalists. 19<br />

More than 100 international non-governmental (NGO) or inter-governmental org-<br />

anisations (IGO) are involved in evaluating or promoting press freedom. Considered as<br />

agents, those organisations constitute a press freedom movement. Altogether, those<br />

provide numerous definitions <strong>and</strong> angles to underst<strong>and</strong>, consider or evaluate press<br />

freedom. Among those with great impact is <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> where members<br />

are among the senior executives in the world’s leading news media. IPI, based in Vienna,<br />

constitute an influential network well involved with the United Nations <strong>and</strong> UNESCO.<br />

IPI’s annually report World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Review monitors press freedom worldwide by<br />

qualitative methods. Another important press freedom NGO is <strong>Freedom</strong> House, based in<br />

Washington, which through detailed legal, political <strong>and</strong> economic criteria measures press<br />

freedom in each country on a scale from 0 (best) to 100 (worst). A similar ranking is made<br />

19 Ibid., pp. 187-205.<br />

18


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

from Reporters Sans Frontieres, based in Paris, through 53 questions. Further, World <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Freedom</strong> Committee coordinates the majority international organisations concerned with<br />

press freedom. 20 WPFC’s criteria for press freedom are formulated in twenty questions, for<br />

instance such as: “Are there restrictive press laws, are journalists in jail, is libel a civil or<br />

criminal offense?” <strong>and</strong> “Is government advertising allocated fairly?” 21<br />

Debates on press freedom <strong>and</strong> hence, the press’ responsibility, are often a hot<br />

issue. 22 The question is, how can responsibility be developed when the press claims<br />

independence? In many countries the media have introduced their own system of codes of<br />

ethics. The purpose has been to create a sense of professional responsibility, as well as to<br />

provide the industry with a system of conflict resolution. The idea is that in such a system,<br />

the government will not interfere with the details of the media’s behaviour <strong>and</strong> would not<br />

be a part of the conflict resolutions – except in the most serious cases which appear in the<br />

court. Such a system, made <strong>and</strong> introduced by the press itself, would be considered as the<br />

practice of press freedom. A similar system, made <strong>and</strong> introduced by the government, may<br />

be considered as an attack on press freedom. As a part of the global spread of press<br />

freedom, a corresponding system of self-governing codes of ethics for the mass media<br />

emerge in more <strong>and</strong> more countries. 23 These are typically administered by media councils<br />

initiated by the press itself.<br />

20 Becker, Lee B., Vlad, Tudor <strong>and</strong> Nusser, Nancy, Measuring <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: A Technical Report (Athens, USA:<br />

Grady College of Journalism & Mass Communication, University of Georgia, 2004), pp. 1-8, 14-15 <strong>and</strong> 34-39.<br />

21 World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee: “Criteria for <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>”,<br />

http://www.wpfc.org/index.jsp?page=Criteria%20For%20<strong>Press</strong>%20<strong>Freedom</strong>, downloaded 28 th March,<br />

2005. WPFC’s homepage: http://www.wpfc.org/<br />

22 Oloo, J. B., “Why media freedom is so vital” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), reader’s<br />

letter, 21 st December, 2003; <strong>and</strong> Ngari, Johnson L., “<strong>Freedom</strong> of the <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> its responsibility” in East<br />

African St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), commentary, 27 th April, 2004.<br />

23 Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, pp. 69-75.<br />

19


Methodology<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

To examine the hypothesis, the thesis’ order starts with globalisation in general, <strong>and</strong> how it<br />

is intertwined with the mass media. The examination of press freedom will be based on<br />

already published data <strong>and</strong> information. Different aspects of press in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East<br />

Africa will include some case studies. The two regions will be described by similar models<br />

to fit into a comparative study. Development <strong>and</strong> the status of press freedom in these two<br />

regions illustrate the practice of international regimes of press freedom.<br />

Sources will be books <strong>and</strong> academic journals in libraries such as the Lillian K.<br />

Beam Library at USIU as well as at UNESCO in Nairobi. There will also be personal<br />

contacts with key-players involved in press freedom both in East Africa <strong>and</strong> Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia<br />

through oral interviews or e-mail. Further, some international organisations engaged in<br />

press freedom will provide information. Articles from magazines <strong>and</strong> newspapers as well<br />

as web-sites <strong>and</strong> unpublished documents will be used.<br />

20


Chapter 2: <strong>Globalisation</strong> of the Mass Media<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Globalised mass media supports other globalisation processes <strong>and</strong> are vehicles for the<br />

economic globalisation process. This chapter has three parts. First, the history of modern<br />

economic globalisation <strong>and</strong> its triggering forces. Second, is the mass media’s role in this<br />

process <strong>and</strong> media’s role in global spread of democracy as the st<strong>and</strong>ard of good<br />

governance. Third, is press freedom as a universal concept with attention to global press<br />

freedom regimes <strong>and</strong> critical debates.<br />

The Economic <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Although there are numerous definitions of ‘globalisation’, the one employed by the<br />

editors of The Globalization of World Politics, John Baylis <strong>and</strong> Steve Smith, is<br />

appropriate. They define globalisation as: “the process of increasing interconnectedness<br />

between societies such that events in one part of the world more <strong>and</strong> more have effects on<br />

peoples <strong>and</strong> societies far away.” 1<br />

Milestones in the History of <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

The modern economic globalisation process can be divided into four phases. 2 First is the<br />

five decades before First World War dominated by the British <strong>and</strong> the French empires.<br />

These empires thought that an open international trade would benefit them because they<br />

had modern technology, steamships, railways, falling transport costs, <strong>and</strong> access to<br />

productive l<strong>and</strong> which contributed to growth in global trade. They led colonisation in<br />

Africa that was part of globalisation. Some countries without colonies in Africa which<br />

benefitted most from the open global trade included the United States, Argentina,<br />

1<br />

Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to international<br />

relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), p. 7.<br />

2<br />

World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty : Building an Inclusive World Economy (Oxford: Oxford<br />

University <strong>Press</strong>, 2002), pp. 23-24.<br />

21


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Australia, <strong>and</strong> New Zeal<strong>and</strong>. These became some of the world’s richest countries due to<br />

l<strong>and</strong> resources, the possibility to import labour force, slaves <strong>and</strong> immigrants, <strong>and</strong> export<br />

commodities. 3<br />

Second was the period between the First World War <strong>and</strong> the Second World War 4<br />

in which there was a decline in international trade due to growing trade barriers,<br />

nationalism, <strong>and</strong> international conflicts. Nationalism resulted in protectionism. 5 Increased<br />

trade barriers removed the benefits of technical progress. The United States, which had<br />

gained huge surpluses from the free trade, wanted to take advantage of the peace process<br />

after the First World War <strong>and</strong> advocated further liberalisation of the global economy.<br />

Among the ideals in the American President Woodrow Wilson’s ‘Fourteen Points’ in 1918<br />

was how collective security could be ensured by cooperation <strong>and</strong> free global trade. If<br />

countries became dependent on each other, he believed, the price of war would rise. 6<br />

However, the British <strong>and</strong> the French had other interests <strong>and</strong> “won” the peace settlement<br />

including economic punishment of the Germans who failed to pay the imposed penalties.<br />

Trade barriers increased, trade policy supported cartels which excluded foreign<br />

competitors. 7 The Great Depression after 1929 worsened the economic situation around the<br />

world. These forces paved the way for Adolf Hitler <strong>and</strong> for another World War.<br />

Third was the period after the Second World War in which Britain <strong>and</strong> the other<br />

European empires were bankrupt <strong>and</strong> broke into pieces. When British Prime Minister,<br />

Winston Churchill, pleaded with the United States for help during the war, the Americans<br />

3<br />

Ibid., pp. 23-26; <strong>and</strong> Herman, Edward S. <strong>and</strong> McChesney, Robert W., The Global Media : The New<br />

Missionaries of Corporate Capitalism (London: Continuum, 1997), pp. 16-17.<br />

4<br />

The era from the First World War to after Second World War is based on: Williams, Andrew, Failed<br />

imagination? : New world orders of the twentieth century (Manchester: Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>,<br />

1998), pp. 50-78; <strong>and</strong> World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 26-28. Other sources are<br />

indicated.<br />

5<br />

Halliday, Fred, “Nationalism” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics, pp. 441-448.<br />

6<br />

Carruthers, Susan L., “<strong>International</strong> history 1900-1945” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization of<br />

World Politics, pp. 56-57.<br />

7<br />

Porter, Michael E., “Competition in Global Industries: A Conceptual Framework” in Porter, Michael E.<br />

(ed.), Competition in Global Industries (Boston: Harvard Business School <strong>Press</strong>, 1986), pp. 42-43.<br />

22


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

took the opportunity to dictate the objectives of the war according to suit American<br />

interests. Global cooperation <strong>and</strong> free trade should be the order, under the United States’<br />

hegemony <strong>and</strong> institutions such as the United Nations, the <strong>International</strong> Monetary Fund<br />

(IMF), the World Bank, <strong>and</strong> the General Agreements on Tariffs <strong>and</strong> Trade (GATT) were<br />

designed as agents for this new world order. 8<br />

Global trade in this period meant increase in trade between developed countries, but<br />

trade barriers towards developing countries. Most of the developing countries did not<br />

participate in the growth of global manufacturing <strong>and</strong> trade during this period. 9 Some<br />

statistics may prove this unfair in global trade. From 1948 to 1988 British export per capita<br />

increased 305%, compared to the figure for Sub-Saharan countries which was 11%.<br />

Concerning import, corresponding figures are similar. In 1948, the British exported 12<br />

times more per capita than the Sub-Saharan countries, a proportion that grew to 44:1 in<br />

1988. For import, corresponding figures are 15:1 in 1948 <strong>and</strong> 56:1 in 1988. 10 Yet, Japan is<br />

considered to be the winner of this period of globalisation. Japan rose from war ruins to be<br />

an economic superpower. 11<br />

Fourth is the period after the 1980s that changed the globalisation process. 12 Firstly,<br />

a group of developing countries broke into the global markets. Among them are China,<br />

India, Malaysia, the Philippines, <strong>and</strong> Thail<strong>and</strong> as well as Argentina, Mexico <strong>and</strong> Turkey.<br />

Altogether, the population of these countries is more than three billion. Secondly, other<br />

developing countries became increasingly marginalised, especially in Africa. Thirdly, the<br />

Cold War ended. Russia <strong>and</strong> her former allies were absorbed into a United States<br />

8<br />

Williams, Failed imagination?, pp. 79-141; <strong>and</strong> Woods, Ngaire, “<strong>International</strong> political economy in an age<br />

of globalization” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics, pp. 278-282.<br />

9<br />

World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 28-31.<br />

10<br />

Rothgeb, John M. Jr., “The Changing <strong>International</strong> Context for Foreign Policy” in Neack, Laura, Hey,<br />

Jeanne A. K. <strong>and</strong> Haney, Patrick J. (eds.), Foreign Policy Analysis : Continuity <strong>and</strong> Change in its Second<br />

Generation (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1995), pp. 39-46.<br />

11<br />

Porter, Michael E., “Competition in Global Industries”, p. 44.<br />

12<br />

The era after 1980s is based on: World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 31-51; <strong>and</strong><br />

Williams, Failed imagination?, pp. 236-239.<br />

23


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

dominated globalised economy. Fourthly, the globalised corporates <strong>and</strong> non-governmental<br />

actors increased in number <strong>and</strong> strength so much that they overshadowed states <strong>and</strong> raised<br />

questions of who was in charge; whether it was the big CEOs or the American politicians.<br />

Fifthly, is the renewed flow of migration <strong>and</strong> capital. During the first period of modern<br />

globalisation, about 10% of the world’s population was relocated. At the same time, there<br />

were few hindrances to international capital flow. These two phenomena have re-emerged<br />

with the reduction of control of capital flow <strong>and</strong> relocation of people. Approximately 120<br />

million people live in foreign countries. In that way, globalisation makes a web of personal<br />

strings around the world. These kind of connections <strong>and</strong> kinships stimulate international<br />

trade.<br />

The Forces Behind the <strong>Globalisation</strong> Processes<br />

Economic forces drive economic globalisation. According to the World Bank, the<br />

newcomer countries in the globalised economy, made their success almost by themselves.<br />

They helped their firms to break into industrial markets by improving infrastructure, skills<br />

<strong>and</strong> institutions, which modern production <strong>and</strong> marketing needed. 13 The marginalised<br />

countries have, according to the World Bank, bad infrastructure, poor education, rampant<br />

corruption, high trade barriers, <strong>and</strong> lack of adequate institutions. 14 Among African<br />

countries, the World Bank <strong>and</strong> IMF’s policy have had positive results in Ug<strong>and</strong>a in terms<br />

of economic growth, 15 <strong>and</strong> more or less collapsed in Zambia. 16<br />

13<br />

World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 32-38.<br />

14<br />

Ibid., pp. 38-41.<br />

15<br />

Leggett, Ian, Ug<strong>and</strong>a : the background : the issues : the people : An Oxfam Country Profile (London:<br />

Oxfam/ Kampala: Fountain Publishers, 2001), pp. 5 <strong>and</strong> 60-62; <strong>and</strong> Datta-Mitra, Jayati (ed.), Ug<strong>and</strong>a :<br />

Policy, Participation, People (Washington: The World Bank, 2001), pp. 3-7 <strong>and</strong> 13.<br />

16<br />

The report Zambia: Condemned to Debt, made by the London-based NGO World Development<br />

Movement, is referred to in: Suri, Sanjay, “How IMF, World Bank Brought Down Zambian Economy” in<br />

The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 7 th June, 2004.<br />

24


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

<strong>Globalisation</strong> subordinates liberal ideals <strong>and</strong> the state has to serve the economic<br />

interests even if these are against its own citizens. 17 As described by Richard Falk, Profes-<br />

sor Emeritus of <strong>International</strong> Law at Princeton University, <strong>and</strong> a well known critic to<br />

mainstream liberal global politics:<br />

“[globalization has] broken the social contract that was forged between state<br />

<strong>and</strong> society … global apartheid … adverse effects … insensitivity to human<br />

suffering … insufficient attention to ecological sustainability … polarization<br />

… marginalization … give government little political space. States are coopted<br />

or subordinated, weakening impulses to regulate on behalf of the<br />

common good.” 18<br />

This opinion is shared by those who claim that the globalisation process can be good if the<br />

starting point could be the needs of people <strong>and</strong> not of companies. 19 Similar is the theory on<br />

‘world-system’ attributed to Immanuel Wallerstein who described the world as core, peri-<br />

phery, <strong>and</strong> semi-periphery. 20 The core is the centre for capitalists, where they collect the<br />

surplus of their business. The raw materials are produced in the periphery where the labour<br />

is unsecured <strong>and</strong> underpaid. In the middle, is the semi-periphery where the welfare is low,<br />

however, states <strong>and</strong> people in this group benefit from the capitalists so that they contribute<br />

to stabilise the system. From Wallerstein’s point of view the globalised international<br />

system is developed to serve capitalist interests. 21 This picture of the world is adopted by<br />

several writers on mass media’s role in globalisation.<br />

The present stage of economic globalisation is made by the architects of American<br />

foreign policy. They have made a world order where the forces that resulted in world wars<br />

are removed. At the same time, the interests which benefit from that order are most of all<br />

17<br />

Petras, James <strong>and</strong> Veltmeyer, Henry, Globalization Unmasked : Imperialism in the 21st Century (London:<br />

Fernwood Publishing, 2001), p. 12.<br />

18<br />

Falk, Richard, Predatory Globalization : A Critique, (Cambridge: Polity <strong>Press</strong>, 1999), cut from pp. 3, 15 <strong>and</strong> 71.<br />

19<br />

Mkapa, Benjamin <strong>and</strong> Halonen, Tarja, “<strong>Globalisation</strong> Can Work, the Question is: How?” in The East<br />

African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary,15 th March, 2004.<br />

20<br />

Smith, “Reflectivist <strong>and</strong> constructivist approaches to international theory”, p. 237; <strong>and</strong> Dunne, Tim:<br />

“Liberalism” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics, p. 179.<br />

21<br />

Wallerstein, Immanuel, “The inter-state structure of the modern world-system” in Smith, Steve, Booth,<br />

Ken; <strong>and</strong> Zalewski, Marysia (eds.), <strong>International</strong> theory: positivism & beyond (Cambridge: Cambridge<br />

University <strong>Press</strong>, 1996), pp. 87-107.<br />

25


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

located in the United States. 22 The system is wrapped up with concepts of American<br />

ideology. In that way, globalisation has led to a global American empire. 23<br />

That empire, according to Noam Chomsky, is full of contradictions between what<br />

the United States professes <strong>and</strong> what it practices at the global level. Noam Chomsky is a<br />

Professor of Linguistics at the Massachusetts <strong>Institute</strong> of Technology. The ‘war on terror’,<br />

he argues, is an excuse for forcing regimes to adapt an American friendly policy while the<br />

United States itself ‘is a leading practioner of international terrorism’. 24 On ‘human rights’,<br />

he notes that the United States gave aid to regimes in Latin America who tortured their<br />

citizens, 25 <strong>and</strong> that the media in the United States serve the American elite interests <strong>and</strong> in<br />

fact undermine democracy. 26<br />

Mass Media Involvement in <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Mass media in general are involved in globalisation in two ways. First are the mass media<br />

as global industry. Second are mass media as the core spreading democracy, shaping<br />

liberal world order <strong>and</strong> creating globally shared culture.<br />

The concept of ‘media globalisation’ or ‘global media’ means large cross-border<br />

flows of mass media content, growth of transnational media corporations, centralisation of<br />

media control, <strong>and</strong> a strong emphasis on the commercial side of media activities. 27 There is<br />

a distinction between the ‘medium’ <strong>and</strong> the process of ‘mass communication’. Media are<br />

instruments of that process. Any instrument that makes ‘mass’ communication can be<br />

22 Williams, Failed imagination?, pp. 284-286.<br />

23 Petras <strong>and</strong> Veltmeyer, Globalization Unmasked, pp. 61-73.<br />

24 Chomsky, Noam, “Commentary: moral truism, empirical evidence; <strong>and</strong> foreign policy” in Review of<br />

<strong>International</strong> Studies (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003), p. 610.<br />

25 Chomsky, Noam, “United States <strong>and</strong> the challenge of relativity” in Evans, Tony (ed.), Human Rights Fifty<br />

Years On : A reappraisal (Manchester: Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>, 1998), p. 27.<br />

26 Herring, Eric <strong>and</strong> Robinson, Piers, “Too polemical or too critical? Chomsky on the study of the news<br />

media <strong>and</strong> US foreign policy” in Review of <strong>International</strong> Studies (Cambridge: Cambridge University<br />

<strong>Press</strong>, 2003), pp. 554-556.<br />

27 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, p. 8.<br />

26


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

defined as a ‘mass medium’. 28 Even if mass media may have a broad meaning which<br />

includes even films, computer games <strong>and</strong> recorded music, the focus is on mass media with<br />

declared social purposes; such as newspapers, parts of radio <strong>and</strong> TV, <strong>and</strong> some magazines<br />

<strong>and</strong> books. Sometimes, these are also categorised as ‘news media’.<br />

How Mass Media Came to be a Globalised Industry<br />

A historical description of how mass media became a global business starts with the news<br />

agencies. During 1850s the Reuters (Britain), Havas 29 (France), <strong>and</strong> Wolff (in areas which<br />

became Germany) created a cartel. They divided functions for providing news from<br />

European colonies to the networks of newspapers in their countries. After some years, the<br />

American Associated <strong>Press</strong> (AP) <strong>and</strong> the rival United <strong>Press</strong>, joined the cartel. This is the<br />

origin of global production of content <strong>and</strong> the foundation of transnational media<br />

corporations. 30<br />

Then, the film industry took its global steps. Hollywood became quickly the<br />

world’s film capital. As early as 1914, 85% of the world’s film audience watched<br />

American films. That rose to 90% before “talkies” created language barriers, which<br />

resulted in a decline of the American film’s global share. However, links between Wall<br />

Street’s investments, Hollywood’s film projects, <strong>and</strong> a global market were established.<br />

British film industry, the sole global challenger to the American, was bought by<br />

Hollywood in the 1960s. 31<br />

Public radio dominated Europe from the earliest years <strong>and</strong> spread to other parts of<br />

the world. The new technology of short wave was introduced at the end of 1920s, <strong>and</strong><br />

removed the borders as limits of radio broadcasting. Radio became global, the whole world<br />

28 Hiebert, Ray Eldon <strong>and</strong> Gibbons, Sheila Jean, Exploring Mass Media for a Changing World (London:<br />

Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1999), p. 23.<br />

29 Now renamed to Agence France <strong>Press</strong>e, AFP.<br />

30 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, pp. 12-13 <strong>and</strong> 18-19.<br />

31 Ibid., pp. 13-15 <strong>and</strong> 19.<br />

27


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

could be served from only one sender, <strong>and</strong> became a tool of ideological warfare. Soviet<br />

Union started, followed by the Nazi Germany, fascists in Italy, BBC, <strong>and</strong> Voice of<br />

America in spreading their propag<strong>and</strong>a worldwide. After 1945, shortwave radio became<br />

the Cold War’s arena for radio warfare. At its peak, 55 countries entered the shortwave<br />

arena with the BBC broadcasting in 46 languages. The Americans used the radio actively<br />

to support their operations in Latin America too. 32<br />

Recorded music grew close to radio as provider of content. The music industry was<br />

similar to the film industry, <strong>and</strong> music was included in large cross-media companies. Five<br />

firms have dominated this business <strong>and</strong> have the main share of global sale; the American<br />

CBS, Warner Brothers, <strong>and</strong> RCA, besides the British EMI <strong>and</strong> the Dutch PolyGram. 33<br />

Televison emerged as the most important new media technology in the postwar<br />

period. Very quickly, televisions were spread in the United States. As an industry, the large<br />

television companies faced strong regulations when those should grow globally. Even if<br />

those had bought shares in television companies abroad, regulations both at home <strong>and</strong> in<br />

countries which wanted to protect their own culture – or by other agendas – locked out the<br />

global TV industry. The door to globalisation of the television therefore became the pro-<br />

gramming, which met regulations too. The American television companies <strong>and</strong> the BBC<br />

took the dominance in two areas where they were permitted to operate, that was on news<br />

<strong>and</strong> sports. Hollywood’s film studios were allowed to take ‘the rest’. 34<br />

Among the different mass media, television is considered to be the one where<br />

interaction between content <strong>and</strong> commerce is developed to the higest level. Some examples<br />

which support this view are: Priority to programs which give commercials an attractive<br />

context <strong>and</strong> public; product placement in programs as ‘hidden promotion’; <strong>and</strong> finally how<br />

consumer ideology is introduced to the public, that creates like-minded consumer needs.<br />

32 Ibid., pp. 14-16.<br />

33 Ibid., pp. 18-20.<br />

34 Ibid., pp. 20-22.<br />

28


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Television gives them the perfect role as the connection between the commodity producer<br />

<strong>and</strong> its market. 35<br />

Newspapers were the earliest widespread mass media, but remain as the part of the<br />

media industry which is least integrated into the global system. 36 Foreign ownership in<br />

major newspapers is still relatively low. 37 The globalisation process has even, as a reaction,<br />

contributed to a wave of ‘localism’ that local media benefit from. 38 That trend is an<br />

advantage for newspapers. However, newspapers are completely included in the mass<br />

media’s transferring of news <strong>and</strong> influence around the world. Further, newspapers have<br />

often an élitist public <strong>and</strong> traditions that make this medium especially influential. 39<br />

Books grew as a mass medium where concentration of the publishing business was<br />

consolidated, but to a lesser degree than the film industry. In the early 1970s, the number<br />

of annual new titles in some countries were: the United States 80,000; United Kingdom<br />

40,000; France 30,000; Nigeria 1,316; <strong>and</strong> Kenya 224. India developed a significant book<br />

industry, yet a little export trade came from this industry. Later, the book industry came to<br />

be concentrated <strong>and</strong> linked to large global media corporations. 40<br />

The internet is the youngest widespread mass media which has achieved global<br />

penetration faster than any other media. However, the bias in access <strong>and</strong> use between the<br />

rich <strong>and</strong> the poor world is extreme. The internet is more complex than any other broad or<br />

narrow media. Internet represents the convergence between content, technology, <strong>and</strong><br />

communication. In that way the internet is the ultimate global roundabout of media from<br />

many points of view; content, users, owners, technology, politicians <strong>and</strong> sellers, with all its<br />

35<br />

Joyrich, Lynne: Re-Viewing Reception : Television, Gender, <strong>and</strong> Postmodern Culture (Indianapolis:<br />

Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1996), pp. 9-14 <strong>and</strong> 169-175.<br />

36<br />

Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, p. 12.<br />

37<br />

Islam, Roumeen, “Into the Looking Glass” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in<br />

Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), p. 21.<br />

38<br />

United States’ Department of Commerce, Globalization of the Mass Media (Washington: U.S. Department<br />

of Commerce, 1993), pp. 215-217.<br />

39<br />

Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, pp. 16-18; <strong>and</strong> Hiebert <strong>and</strong> Gibbons, Exploring Mass Media for a<br />

Changing World, p. 141-142.<br />

40<br />

Ibid., pp. 19-20.<br />

29


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

threats <strong>and</strong> possibilities. The internet will, as other media, produce new winners <strong>and</strong> losers.<br />

How the internet will change political patterns is still too early to determine. 41<br />

From a functional point of view, globalisation of mass media has resulted in some<br />

key features. First, global media channels reach all the places on the globe. Second, even<br />

local media are influenced by globalism in its content, or ownership as well as through<br />

market forces. Third, a global audience has emerged <strong>and</strong> share a great part of common<br />

content <strong>and</strong> experiences, including commercials <strong>and</strong> the content’s underlying ideology.<br />

Fourth, the increased number of media have penetrated almost all everyday situations. The<br />

mass media’s variety has been developed to pluralism in all its dimensions. Fifth, the<br />

owners have grown in size, declined in numbers, <strong>and</strong> have constructed connections<br />

between different media which constitute great conglomerates with a large number of<br />

media. The result is a concentration of media control into few h<strong>and</strong>s. These are in the<br />

cores, in terms of the world-system theory. Sixth, crossconnections within media, conver-<br />

gence, <strong>and</strong> media connections to commodities have intertwined mass media together with<br />

each other, with communication technology <strong>and</strong> with other kinds of industry. Seventh, the<br />

bias between the rich <strong>and</strong> poor parts of the world in access <strong>and</strong> use of media is extensive.<br />

And finally, media have always played a political role. Emergence of global media<br />

increase the strengths to play a role in global politics, culture, <strong>and</strong> promotion.<br />

The forces which triggered the globalisation of mass media are the logic of econo-<br />

mic growth, similar to other globalised business. In media, growth in audience is the key to<br />

success. 42 Growth can emerge as ‘segment growth’ where target groups or the assortment<br />

of products are increased in specific market niches. Another is ‘vertical growth’ where, for<br />

instance, a film producer enter into cinemas <strong>and</strong> TV stations. The ‘geographical growth’ is<br />

41 Aronson, Jonathan D., “The communications <strong>and</strong> Internet recolution” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization<br />

of World Politics, pp. 541-551; <strong>and</strong> Strömberg, David, “Distributing News <strong>and</strong> Political Influence”<br />

in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The<br />

World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), p. 104.<br />

42 Strömberg, “Distributing News <strong>and</strong> Political Influence”, p. 96.<br />

30


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

to spread already established business geographically. 43 Even if the geographical direction<br />

is the globalisation issue, these kinds of growths support each other. 44 The advertisement<br />

industry’s need of global markets have also supported globalisation of mass media. Other<br />

forces behind globalisation of media have been migration, propag<strong>and</strong>a for political<br />

ideology, new technology <strong>and</strong> a more connected world in any ways.<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> Spread of Democracy<br />

<strong>Globalisation</strong> spreads democracy as the st<strong>and</strong>ard of good governance. Democracy is<br />

associated with free press which is considered as a cornerstone of democratisation. 45<br />

Western democracies are influenced both by the libertarian system of the role of media as<br />

well as a sense of social responsibility <strong>and</strong> the capitalistic system. First, liberal ideals,<br />

which grew together with the development of the democracy in Western countries, ruled<br />

the press. 46 Then, after the Second World War, two trends resulted in the rise of a social<br />

responsibility view within the Western press. On one h<strong>and</strong>, the press was included in the<br />

optimistic democratic wave in the Western world immediately after the Second World<br />

War. The press took a key role in the building of these new democracies, <strong>and</strong> in the<br />

consolidation of existing democracies, 47 <strong>and</strong> at the same time became aware of its own<br />

increasing potential. A growth of sc<strong>and</strong>alous popular newspapers <strong>and</strong> purely entertaining<br />

mass media, such as radio <strong>and</strong> films, had squeezed the established press which became<br />

more concerned about its own role. 48<br />

43 Porter, Michael E., “Competition in Global Industries”, p. 22.<br />

44 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, pp. 40-45 <strong>and</strong> 54.<br />

45 Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony, “The Media in Democratic <strong>and</strong> Nondemocratic Regimes: A<br />

Multilevel Perspective” in Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony (eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A<br />

Comparative Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp. 5 <strong>and</strong> 9.<br />

46 Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 167-172.<br />

47 Righter, Rosemary, IPI: The Undivided Word : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> : Part I:<br />

1951-1976 (London/Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1988 [1976]), pp. 10-11 <strong>and</strong> 21.<br />

48 Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 271-282.<br />

31


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

In the United States some of these aspects were picked up by the Hutchins<br />

Commission in 1947. It criticised sensational trends, examined the role of the press, <strong>and</strong><br />

came up with the concept of ‘social responsibility’. 49 Ideally, media’s social responsibility<br />

in a democracy is to influence economic, political <strong>and</strong> social outcomes to be the best for<br />

the citizens. 50 The debate on New World Information <strong>and</strong> Communication Order (NWICO)<br />

can be considered to be a global consequence of this trend of social responsibility. The last<br />

system, capitalism, increased its influence during the last decades. That system influenced<br />

the majority of media to make profit for the owners as the primary purpose, before the<br />

media can fulfill its social purposes. 51<br />

The idea of a democracy is the rule of the people. 52 A condition of such a broad<br />

involvement of people is the need for information. Since the government is supposed to act<br />

in the interests of its citizens, information is a public good that people need in order to<br />

participate in the democratic processes. The free media’s role is to gather <strong>and</strong> distribute<br />

information to ensure that the elected government works for its people. Open access to<br />

information ensures quality in debates <strong>and</strong> decision making processes resulting in the best<br />

politics for the public. Such openness <strong>and</strong> flow of information are essential parts of good<br />

governance. 53 While press freedom ensures independent information, a plurality of media<br />

actors will enhances the possibilities that each voice would have access to the public<br />

sphere even if each single channel is influenced by particular interests as they compete in<br />

the ‘marketplace of ideas’. This concept is based on John Stuart Mill’s philosophy. 54<br />

The information process in a democracy includes many actors beyond a free press.<br />

These may be opposition parties, a myriad of public interest organisations, as well as<br />

49<br />

Ibid., pp. 283-287.<br />

50<br />

Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, p. 21.<br />

51<br />

Hiebert <strong>and</strong> Gibbons, Exploring Mass Media for a Changing World, pp. 45-49.<br />

52<br />

Philip’s, Philip’s Encyclopedia, p. 271.<br />

53<br />

Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, p. 27-43.<br />

54<br />

Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, p. 40.<br />

32


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

persistent individuals. These forces supposedly check the authorities, whether<br />

governments, private institutions, organisations <strong>and</strong> powerful individuals. Forces within<br />

the private corporate sector <strong>and</strong> the civil society have to be subjected to the same critical<br />

attention by media as government. 55<br />

Even within liberal philosophy, press freedom will come into conflict with other<br />

freedoms <strong>and</strong> values. These may, for instance, be need for secrecy; individual, institutional<br />

<strong>and</strong> national interests; <strong>and</strong> different ways to consider responsibility. 56 Therefore, press<br />

freedom has to be balanced with other freedoms or concerns. Such a ranking of press<br />

freedom against other concerns is what the whole process about implementing of press<br />

freedom is about.<br />

<strong>Freedom</strong> of expression, including freedom of the press, grew up together with ideas<br />

of the Enlightenment. 57 As a universal principle it found its way into the Human Rights<br />

Declaration by the United Nations at 1948. 58 Article 19 states that: “Everyone has the right<br />

to freedom of opinion <strong>and</strong> expression; this right includes freedom to hold opinions without<br />

interference <strong>and</strong> to seek, receive <strong>and</strong> import information <strong>and</strong> ideas through any media <strong>and</strong><br />

regardless of frontiers.” 59 However, due to the great degree of differences in traditions <strong>and</strong><br />

politics around the world, the power of the Human Rights article 19 is limited. Hence, the<br />

European Convention on Human Rights article 10 – with similar content – makes a<br />

55<br />

Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, p. 40; <strong>and</strong> Dyck, Alex<strong>and</strong>er <strong>and</strong> Zingales, Luigi, “The Corporate<br />

Governance Role of the Media” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />

Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), 107-111; <strong>and</strong><br />

Transparency <strong>International</strong> – Kenya, Lesson From the Fight Against Corruption (Nairobi: Transparency<br />

<strong>International</strong> – Kenya, 2001), pp. 12-13.<br />

56<br />

Miller, William L. “Introduction: Alternative values” in Miller, William L. (ed.), Alternatives to <strong>Freedom</strong> :<br />

arguments <strong>and</strong> opinions (New York: Longman, 1995), pp. 1-17.<br />

57<br />

Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 101-102; <strong>and</strong> Eide, Martin, Den redigerende makt :<br />

Redaktørrollens norske historie (Kristians<strong>and</strong>, Norway: IJ-forlaget, 2000), p. 115.<br />

58<br />

United Nations, Basic Facts About the United Nations (New York: United Nations, 2000), pp. 216-217.<br />

59<br />

World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee: “Fundamentals”, http://www.wpfc.org/index.jsp?page=Fundamentals ,<br />

downloaded 28 th March, 2005. WPFC’s homepage: http://www.wpfc.org/<br />

33


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

stronger protection of these freedoms than the universal declaration. The reason is that the<br />

European countries have a more homogeneous history than other parts in the world. 60<br />

The United States dominates how concepts such as democracy <strong>and</strong> press freedom<br />

are interpreted around the world. Characteristic values of the American society are<br />

optimism, action, belief in progress, growth <strong>and</strong> science, as well as education as the key to<br />

the future. In such a value system, the press have a prominent role <strong>and</strong> is a strong<br />

instrument of power with a great potential for good. 61 In the United States political <strong>and</strong><br />

commercial interests benefit from global spreading of American values, supported by the<br />

mass media.<br />

Mass media produce or influence a society’s shared experience <strong>and</strong> underst<strong>and</strong>ing.<br />

Even if a medium can have objectivity as a declared goal, this is difficult. The whole<br />

process of deciding policy, selecting focus, selecting information, presentation, <strong>and</strong><br />

distribution are all influenced by someone’s subjective opinion. That ‘someone’ is the<br />

force that rules the actual medium. In that way, media are a main source for a community’s<br />

ideology. Despite the media’s plurality, the interests of a few are the determining factor. If<br />

all the dominating mass media are streamlined according to their interests, then, the public<br />

opinion is not a result of plural impulses by the media, but a result of many media impulses<br />

similarly lopsided by the same interests. Such kind of systematically lopsided information<br />

will sway the ideology in the same direction. 62<br />

Theories about mass media in terms of ideological hegemony were made by<br />

Marxist critics such as T. W. Adorno, Max Horkheimer, <strong>and</strong> Herbert Marcuse. They claim<br />

that mass media have risen under capitalism <strong>and</strong> mass media have been instruments of<br />

commodification. Mass media have created a mass culture that successfully channels<br />

desire into a commodity structure, manipulates the audience’s sense of needs, <strong>and</strong><br />

60<br />

Eggen, Kyrre, Ytringsfrihet : Vernet om ytringsfriheten i norsk rett (Oslo: Cappelen, 2002) , pp. 136-138.<br />

61<br />

Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, p. 238.<br />

62<br />

Briggs, Adam <strong>and</strong> Cobley, Paul (eds.), The Media: An Introduction (Essex: Longman, 1998), pp. 277-282.<br />

34


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

homogenises pleasure. In that way commercial interests have determined the logic of mass<br />

media because they provide the mass media’s income. That process includes more than<br />

commercials <strong>and</strong> advertisements. The whole underlying ideology imparted through the<br />

editorial content, the programs, films, <strong>and</strong> music, will together influence the public’s<br />

feelings of needs as consumers. Simultaneously, these media have offered a perfect<br />

occasion for its advertisers’ messages. In that way, the mass media create a consumer<br />

ideology that creates markets <strong>and</strong> supports the advertisers commercial interests far beyond<br />

the actual advertisement, claim these critics. 63<br />

Economic globalisation include spreading of democracy including press freedom.<br />

The economic interests behind globalisation expect the democracy to not only be good for<br />

its citizens, but also to give commercial business the best conditions possible. Regarding<br />

the public, the idea is that economic growth will provide everyone with improved welfare.<br />

That is the theory, the practical experience gives another record where the gap between<br />

rich <strong>and</strong> poor is widening. However, due to such a philosophy, spreading democracy<br />

means advancing the interests of those behind economic globalisation. 64 It is here where<br />

press freedom comes in. The dilemma is that spreading of press freedom conducted by the<br />

interests behind globalisation is similar to spreading of business freedom. That is not<br />

identical with press freedom in terms of social responsibility.<br />

Jürgen Habermas is concerned with media <strong>and</strong> global aspects of democracy. He is<br />

Professor Eremitus at the University of Frankfurt, <strong>and</strong> Professor of Philosophy at<br />

Northwestern University in the United States. He emphasises the contradiction between<br />

democracy limited to state borders, when the economic <strong>and</strong> cultural forces work globally.<br />

His theory on ‘radical democracy’ says that state borders are obstacles for democratic<br />

63 Joyrich, Re-Viewing Reception, pp. 22-26 <strong>and</strong> 33.<br />

64 Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, pp. 21-22.<br />

35


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

rights. He recognises media’s role in global democracy, but has a critical approach to<br />

whose interests media actually are serving. 65<br />

<strong>Press</strong> freedom as means of democracy or human rights has been criticised. One<br />

problem can be a narrow underst<strong>and</strong>ing of press freedom, for instance freedom to publish<br />

without free access to information. Despite declared press freedom, such a practice is a<br />

sabotage of public’s right to know, a condition for freedom of expression. 66 Or as stated by<br />

the Malaysian foreign minister Abdullah Badawi at the summit of the Association of<br />

South-East Asian Nations (ASEAN) in 1998: “Too much freedom could destroy<br />

democracy.” 67 Several regimes have developed press freedom instruments such as ‘code of<br />

ethics’ <strong>and</strong> a ‘national press council’ in democratisation processes. However, the purpose<br />

for using these terms has been to get recognition by the dominant countries in the<br />

international community, but not necessarily to increase the practice of press freedom. 68<br />

Another problem can be that the press has freedom, but do not use it to fulfil demo-<br />

cratic goals. The media are described as gatekeepers for the public debate. 69 The issue is<br />

about what guiding principles determine media’s performance, is it social responsibility or<br />

profit? In this case, Noam Chomsky stated that “in relatively free societies without state<br />

controls, the sinister fact is that censorship is largely voluntary.” 70 That means that press<br />

freedom is established, but is not utilised to all its limits to achieve democratic goals.<br />

65 Habermas, Jürgen, “Toward a Cosmopolitian Europe” in Journal of Democracy (Baltimore: The Johns<br />

Hopkins University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003), volume 14, number 4, pp. 86-100; <strong>and</strong> Hobden, Stephen <strong>and</strong> Jones,<br />

Richard Wyn, “Marxist theories of <strong>International</strong> Relations” in Baylis <strong>and</strong> Smith (eds.), The Globalization<br />

of World Politics, pp. 214-216.<br />

66 Linard, Law <strong>and</strong> Ethics of the Media, pp. 15-17.<br />

67 Kunczik, Michael, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?” in Kunczik, Michael<br />

(ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-<br />

Stiftung, 1999), p. 256.<br />

68 Moisy, Claude, ”Imposing Code of Ethics for Journalists : Less Innocent Than They Might Seem” in The<br />

World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, New Code Words For Censorship : Modern Labels for Curbs on the<br />

<strong>Press</strong> (Reston, USA: The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, 2002), pp. 5-6.<br />

69 Richardson, Brian, “The Public’s Right to Know: A Dangerous Notion” in Journal of Mass Media Ethics<br />

(New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004) volume 19, number 1-2004, pp. 52.<br />

70 Chomsky, “United States <strong>and</strong> the challenge of relativity”, p. 25.<br />

36


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Concerning human rights, a purpose of press freedom is to protect all the other<br />

human rights. 71 However, many countries even reject that human rights are universal. 72<br />

More than 120 new states have come into being since the Universal Declaration of Human<br />

Rights of 1948. From Asia <strong>and</strong> Africa it is argued that the emphasis on individual rights is<br />

inappropriate. 73 Some of these poor countries have even refused to approve some of the<br />

United Nations’ conventions concerning free media. They consider these to be<br />

arrangements which further consolidate Western media as means for dominance over poor<br />

countries. 74<br />

An effect of globalisation is a separation between principles of human rights <strong>and</strong> its<br />

realisation. That means that the principles of these freedoms <strong>and</strong> rights have spread but<br />

adverse effects of globalisation have hindered realisation. 75 Regarding global governance,<br />

press freedom concerns democracy, social responsibility <strong>and</strong> human rights. In<br />

globalisation, economic forces have moved from state to global level. The political power,<br />

however, remains mainly at state level. The United Nations or any other has not achieved<br />

position to conduct a strong global governance. 76 In states, it is expected that press freedom<br />

is cornerstone of good governance in public as well as in private sector. 77 When it comes to<br />

global governance, global media seem not to use press freedom to carry out social<br />

responsibility to fulfil universal human rights. This is because the global ruling elites are<br />

71<br />

An-na’im, Abdulla, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right” in Willie Musarurwa<br />

Memorial Trust, Towards <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> (Harare, Zimbabwe: Willie Musarurwa Memorial Trust <strong>and</strong><br />

Konrad Adenauer Stiftung, 1996), p. 24.<br />

72<br />

Kunczik, Michael, “Introduction: <strong>Freedom</strong> of the press – where to draw the line?”, in Kunczik, Michael<br />

(ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-<br />

Stiftung, 1999), p. 7.<br />

73<br />

Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, pp. 255-256.<br />

74<br />

Ahuja, Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism, p. 185.<br />

75<br />

McGrew, Anthomy, “Human rights in a global age: coming to terms with globalisation” in Evans, Tony (ed.),<br />

Human Rights Fifty Years On : A reappraisal (Manchester: Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>, 1998), pp. 188-189.<br />

76<br />

Falk, Predatory Globalization, p. 61.<br />

77<br />

Dyck <strong>and</strong> Zingales, “The Corporate Governance Role of the Media”, p. 135.<br />

37


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

powerful enough to manipulate press freedom <strong>and</strong> universal human rights to serve their<br />

interests. 78<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> as a Universal Concept<br />

Concepts such as ‘democracy’ <strong>and</strong> ‘press freedom’ do not come up or spread by<br />

themselves, they are formualted <strong>and</strong> promoted by competing forces pushing their particular<br />

interests. When globalisation spreads press freedom, questions arise as to who defines,<br />

pursues <strong>and</strong> practises press freedom as a universal concept. According to constructivism<br />

theory, these questions are discussed with attention to global regimes, agents for press<br />

freedom, <strong>and</strong> how circumstances constitute good conditions for press freedom.<br />

<strong>International</strong> Regimes on Global <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

Regimes on press freedom are for instance legal conventions, institutions or NGOs which<br />

have gained authority to decide or influence in such matters. A clear regime on press<br />

freedom is maintained by the United Nations. The Secretary-General Kofi A. Annan<br />

formulated the present universal notion of press freedom as: “A free press is one of the<br />

most essential components of a democratic society, which in turn is a prerequisite for<br />

sustainable social <strong>and</strong> economic development.” The United Nations has also declared 3 rd<br />

May every year to be observed as the <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Day. 79<br />

Article 19 in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights of 1948 deals with<br />

freedom of information. Its roots are in the 17 th century Enlightenment <strong>and</strong> ideals<br />

associated with the development of Western democracies. After 1948, the United Nations<br />

developed more details on conditions for press freedom. These include the Convention on<br />

<strong>Freedom</strong> of Information as well as The Convention on the <strong>International</strong> Transmission of<br />

78 An-na’im, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right”, p. 25.<br />

79 United Nations, “Joint Message for World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Day 3 May 2001”. A leaflet published by United<br />

Nations, UNESCO, <strong>and</strong> UN High Commissioner for Human Rights.<br />

38


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

News <strong>and</strong> the Convention on the <strong>International</strong> Right of Correction. 80 In this way the United<br />

Nations played a leading role in formulating <strong>and</strong> implementing an international regime on<br />

press freedom. On this basis even strong regional regimes, such as the European Con-<br />

vention on Human Rights, are constituted. 81<br />

The United Nations is influenced heavily by the United States. The philosophy of<br />

the Enlightenment had a great impact on American thinking about journalism <strong>and</strong> press<br />

freedom. 82 In the era of globalisation under the United States’ hegemony, the American<br />

version of these freedom ideals has been spread. Article 19 in the Universal Declaration of<br />

Human Rights upholds similar ideals as those for press freedom in the United States.<br />

In several ways the United States is a chief actor in forming <strong>and</strong> spreading press<br />

freedom globally. American actors have been substantial donors to campaigns <strong>and</strong> NGOs<br />

concerning global spread of press freedom. 83 American media practice has influenced<br />

similar development in other countries, for instance regarding the Fourth Estate role <strong>and</strong><br />

commercialisation. Notions of the press as the Fourth Estate in its role as watchdog<br />

emerged first in the United States. The mainstream American view has regarded an<br />

independent press to be in an adversarial role to government, 84 that is widely accepted as<br />

the model which serves democracies best. 85<br />

Americans have also spearheaded commercialisation of media. In the United States<br />

the view has been that only a market-based press can be independent <strong>and</strong> play a<br />

democratically legitimate role. 86 Recent debates on American media claim that ideals such<br />

80 Ahuja, Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism, pp. 179-184.<br />

81 Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, pp. 68-71; <strong>and</strong> Carver, Richard, Coliver, S<strong>and</strong>ra, Lauriciano, Gil,<br />

Lush, David <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Adewale, Who Rules the Airwaves : Broadcasting in Africa (London:<br />

Article 19 <strong>and</strong> Index on Censorship, 1995), pp. 23-27.<br />

82 Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 31-64.<br />

83 Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, pp. 29, 107, 111, 147 <strong>and</strong> 162 points out Ford Foundation, Rockefeller<br />

Foundation, Carnegie Endowment for <strong>International</strong> Peace <strong>and</strong> 20 American newspapers, as examples.<br />

84 Patterson, “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society”, pp. 248-251.<br />

85 Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, pp. 2-5.<br />

86 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, p. 24.<br />

39


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

as social responsibility <strong>and</strong> a free marketplace of ideas have lost value since the chief goal<br />

has been to create <strong>and</strong> attract a large audience for advertisers, to gain profit. 87 Acceptance<br />

of claims that media have to be successful businesses in order to play a political <strong>and</strong><br />

cultural role, <strong>and</strong> to support economic development, 88 illustrate how the Americans define<br />

<strong>and</strong> globally influence notions of press freedom being markets as bases for independence.<br />

Despite the United States’ high democratic profile, there are times when press<br />

freedom is in conflict with interests of the political elites. 89 An example is the treatment of<br />

journalists in the war in Iraq in which journalists were embedded or had to be licensed to<br />

be in the Iraqi war zone. A study on the practice from March to May, 2003, concluded that<br />

there were a vast number of press freedom violations by the United States led coalition that<br />

targeted non-embedded journalists for harassment <strong>and</strong> confiscation of equipment. These<br />

journalists were fired upon <strong>and</strong> even deported. An American general pointed out that only<br />

embedded journalists would receive protection which contradicts the 1949 Geneva<br />

Convention as well as human rights. 90<br />

Agents are individuals, insitutions or forces which promote regimes. Among agents<br />

promoting regimes on press freedom, attention is given to the World Bank, NGOs, media<br />

ethics <strong>and</strong> education. First, the World Bank <strong>and</strong> IMF spread the United Nations’ <strong>and</strong> the<br />

United States’ global regimes on press freedom. The World Bank’s contribution, in<br />

particular, is spreading of the neo-liberal notion of press freedom in countries the bank is<br />

involved with <strong>and</strong> claims that press freedom supports development. ‘Development<br />

87<br />

Patterson, “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society”, p. 253; <strong>and</strong> Real, Michael R., Exploring<br />

Media Culture : A Guide (New Delhi: Sage Publications, 1996), p. 148.<br />

88<br />

Owen, Bruce M., “Media as Industry: Economic Foundations of Mass Communications” in World Bank,<br />

The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />

Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 167-168.<br />

89<br />

Herring <strong>and</strong> Robinson, “Too polemical or too critical? Chomsky on the study of the news media <strong>and</strong> US<br />

foreign policy”, pp. 554-555.<br />

90<br />

Leaper, Glenn W., Löwstedt, Anthony <strong>and</strong> Madhoun, Husam, Caught in the Crossfire: The Iraq War <strong>and</strong> the<br />

Media – A Diary of Claims <strong>and</strong> Counterclaims (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003), pp. 75-77.<br />

40


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

journalism’ was promoted by poor countries, a notion where media were supposed to<br />

support development efforts <strong>and</strong> its authorities.<br />

The World Bank’s ‘development journalism’ is quite the opposite <strong>and</strong> is based on<br />

the philosophy of liberalism. From this view the mass media provide a voice to people,<br />

improve transparency <strong>and</strong> reduce authorities’ scope to act on other interests than its<br />

citizens’. 91 Beyond these democratic <strong>and</strong> development arguments emphasis is on how<br />

media need to be based on market economy to ensure independence. 92 The World Bank<br />

presumes that press freedom compensates lack of good governance even in private<br />

sector. 93 Hence, press freedom supports liberal democratisation globally, partly<br />

independence of states.<br />

Second, a web of international NGOs act as press freedom agents. Some of them<br />

have even developed own regimes in accordance with the United Nation’s press freedom<br />

regime. 94 These NGOs constitute a global press freedom movement. They are advocating,<br />

monitoring <strong>and</strong> influencing practices on press freedom around the world. Further, as a<br />

network these NGOs connect institutions <strong>and</strong> professionals concerned with press<br />

freedom. 95 The efforts are to some extent coordinated by the World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

Committee based in Virginia in the United States. 96 WPFC acts as international umbrella<br />

organisation for 45 NGOs “united in the defense <strong>and</strong> promotion of press freedom”. 97 Most<br />

of the NGOs concerned with press freedom are based in the United States or Europe. Some<br />

of them have status as partners or observers with the United Nations <strong>and</strong> UNESCO. Hence,<br />

NGOs also establish relations between the media industry <strong>and</strong> governments.<br />

91<br />

Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, p. 1; <strong>and</strong> Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, p. 27.<br />

92<br />

Owen, “Media as Industry: Economic Foundations of Mass Communications”, pp. 167-168.<br />

93<br />

Dyck <strong>and</strong> Zingales, “The Corporate Governance Role of the Media”, pp. 109 <strong>and</strong> 135.<br />

94<br />

Becker, Vlad <strong>and</strong> Nusser, Measuring <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: A Technical Report, pp. 1-15.<br />

95<br />

Ahuja, Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism, p. 187.<br />

96<br />

World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, “Contact us”, http://www.wpfc.org/index.jsp?page=Contact,<br />

downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />

97<br />

World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, “Welcome to the World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee”<br />

http://www.wpfc.org/, downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />

41


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

An example of interaction between media industry, NGOs <strong>and</strong> the United Nations<br />

is how UNESCO in 1947 proposed an ‘international institute of press <strong>and</strong> information’.<br />

That one should fulfil a policy where the press worked responsibly <strong>and</strong> supported<br />

democratisation. The press adapted the idea but refused that it should be subordinated to<br />

any body connected to governments. To ensure this request for independence, UNESCO<br />

left it to the press itself. Then the <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> was established as an NGO.<br />

Today, IPI is an authority on global press freedom. 98<br />

Third, harmonising of media ethics reduces press freedom to a narrow but powerful<br />

concept. Beyond laws, codes of conduct make up the framework for practices. Common<br />

points on media ethics include responsibility, independence, human rights, tolerance, truth,<br />

professional confidence <strong>and</strong> privacy. 99 There is also proposed a move from codes of ethics<br />

over to universal ethical principles. The message is how social responsibility should be<br />

interpreted by media in a globalised world. 100 In the same spirit ‘democracy’ is emphasised<br />

as such a universal value which should be the basis of all journalism. These calls for ethics<br />

of ‘democratic journalism’ invoke universal validity. 101<br />

Fourth, journalism education <strong>and</strong> professionalisation of the industry is also<br />

supposed to narrow <strong>and</strong> strengthen press freedom. It has been common to argue for better<br />

qualified journalists as well as professional norms which harmonise behaviour. 102<br />

Education institutions make up an international web. When press freedom is established as<br />

a cornerstone of the press’ role, these schools implement press freedom as a shared notion<br />

among journalists globally. For that reason Western actors have supported development of<br />

98<br />

Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, pp 24-26; <strong>and</strong> <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI – The First Ten Years :<br />

The Story of the <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> (Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1962), p. 11; <strong>and</strong> The<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1950-2000 : <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Institute</strong>, 2000), p. 3.<br />

99<br />

Kunczik, “Introduction: <strong>Freedom</strong> of the press – where to draw the line?”, p. 20.<br />

100<br />

Christians, Clifford <strong>and</strong> Nordenstreng, Kaarle, “Social Responsibility Worldvide” in Journal of Mass<br />

Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004), volume 19, number 1, pp. 13-15.<br />

101<br />

Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, pp. 264-268.<br />

102 Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, 140 <strong>and</strong> 145-149; <strong>and</strong> Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 91-93.<br />

42


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

journalism schools in poor countries. 103 Journalism schools focus on reporting <strong>and</strong> writing.<br />

The World Bank has pointed out the need of education in business <strong>and</strong> management of<br />

media to support implementation of press freedom in poor countries. That will strengthen<br />

media to operate as independent actors in a free market environment. 104<br />

Professionalisation <strong>and</strong> harmonised education can be in contradiction with<br />

liberalism <strong>and</strong> the ‘marketplace of ideas’. More like-minded journalists narrows media’s<br />

ability to expose plurality. From the South, a viewpoint is that Western ideas remain<br />

dominant in such a harmonised practice of journalism. 105<br />

Circumstances are created to support the development <strong>and</strong> spread of international<br />

regimes on press freedom in four ways. These are market economy, global culture, civil<br />

society <strong>and</strong> legitimacy. First, liberal market economy is the policy behind globalisation.<br />

The major points are how globalisation of mass media <strong>and</strong> the economic globalisation are<br />

intertwined, <strong>and</strong> how global media support other globalised business. For media itself,<br />

liberal market economy means deregulation, privatisation <strong>and</strong> a commercial purpose.<br />

These are considered to be bases for independence <strong>and</strong> freedom. 106 Then, to gain freedom<br />

media have to be run just like any other business. Outputs that give media income are<br />

content <strong>and</strong> audience. The goal will be growth in audience <strong>and</strong> circulation which are<br />

media’s key to business success. Common interests between media <strong>and</strong> advertisers<br />

constitute a partnership with other industries. 107 If local markets are capable, media can<br />

103<br />

Eikje, Ove, “God journalistikk er en vaktbikkje” in Dagen (Bergen, Norway: Dagbladet Dagen), news<br />

article, 18 th February, 2004.<br />

104<br />

Carrington, Tim <strong>and</strong> Nelson, Mark, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics” in World Bank,<br />

The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />

Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 244-245.<br />

105<br />

Omw<strong>and</strong>a, Lewis Odhiambo, “Values, st<strong>and</strong>ards <strong>and</strong> ethics in journalism: The way forward for subsaharan<br />

Africa” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya<br />

(Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), p. 187.<br />

106<br />

Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, pp. 38-40; <strong>and</strong> Carrington <strong>and</strong> Nelson, “Media in Transition:<br />

The Hegemony of Economics”, p. 226.<br />

107<br />

Owen, “Media as Industry: Economic Foundations of Mass Communications”, pp. 167-172.<br />

43


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

achieve economic independence from governments <strong>and</strong> achieve press freedom. However,<br />

at the same time these media are subordinated to impact from market logics.<br />

Second, global culture works supportively for global press freedom. There are<br />

interactions among cultures, media <strong>and</strong> identity. Culture can be understood as how the life<br />

is formulated in symbols, <strong>and</strong> how these symbols structure context. Then, media is the<br />

technology that carries this culture. Identity is how self-images are made in this context of<br />

media culture. 108 Hegemony is how one group can maintain power or dominance over<br />

other groups. Global media maintain such a hegemony, <strong>and</strong> these are based in the West.<br />

Hence, development of a global culture supports a global hegemony. In the framework of<br />

commercialisation, culture is big business for global media. Culture as sport, films,<br />

entertainment <strong>and</strong> music constitute a major part of content in mass media. Men <strong>and</strong> women<br />

in this culture are important actors in news. When this culture is shared globally, the<br />

markets for media are global. Global mass media make culture to be global culture, <strong>and</strong><br />

make global culture to be business. 109 The industry of global culture gets the biggest profit<br />

if media are free <strong>and</strong> based on liberal market economy. Hence, global culture is a force<br />

which supports such a notion of global press freedom.<br />

Third, empowerment of civil society supports press freedom. Due to the watchdog<br />

role, it is not expected that governments will be a front runner for press freedom. Media<br />

<strong>and</strong> civil society made up a counterweight to power of state <strong>and</strong> politicians. According to<br />

Jürgen Habermas, communities have to recognise how journalism has a function as public<br />

good, that democracy lives in civil society, <strong>and</strong> that media make a culture of dialogue<br />

possible. 110 The neoliberal policy spread by globalisation emphasises importance of civil<br />

society <strong>and</strong> a reduced role to state <strong>and</strong> government. If power is decentralised, an<br />

108 Real, Exploring Media Culture, p. 35.<br />

109 Ibid., pp. 148-150, 168 <strong>and</strong> 249-253.<br />

110 Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, p. 255.<br />

44


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

empowered civil society ensures accountability <strong>and</strong> transparency. 111 Mass media free from<br />

government control enable the civil society to take this enlarged position. 112<br />

Fourth, legitimacy is necessary for rulers <strong>and</strong> media are legitimising tools.<br />

Government achieve legitimacy among citizens by having a free <strong>and</strong> vibrant press which<br />

people know the press to be free <strong>and</strong> transparent. Hence, a democratic government <strong>and</strong><br />

democratic decision processes achieve public support <strong>and</strong> confidence. 113 In authoritarian<br />

regimes media are turned to cement the existing power <strong>and</strong> legitimise the rulers both<br />

domestic <strong>and</strong> abroad. As in ‘development journalism’, institutions as education <strong>and</strong> media<br />

were used to legitimise the hegemony of the ruling class. 114 In a democracy, media build<br />

support for the state system itself even if the actual government is critisised <strong>and</strong> maybe<br />

lose next election.<br />

Debates on Global <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

The global spread of press freedom has became controversial from three perspectives.<br />

First, is the question of global media’s dominant position. Second, is on how the<br />

development agenda connects media with economic globalisation. Third are some African<br />

perspectives on press freedom.<br />

First, global media have grown to take a dominant position in the present world<br />

order. Due to concentration of ownership, even a few media companies dominate global<br />

media. The table below presents the annual turnover for the biggest global media<br />

111<br />

Litvack, Jennie <strong>and</strong> Seddon, Jessica, Decentralization Briefing Notes (Washington: The World Bank<br />

<strong>Institute</strong>, 2000), pp. 97-99.<br />

112<br />

Besley, Timothy, Burgess, Robin <strong>and</strong> Prat, Andrea, “Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Political Accountability” in World<br />

Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />

Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 45-46, 49-50 <strong>and</strong> 58-59.<br />

113<br />

Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, p. 63.<br />

114<br />

Abubakar, Dauda, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa” in Domatob,<br />

Jerry, Jika, Abubakar <strong>and</strong> Nwosu, Ikechukwu (eds.), Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society (Nairobi: The<br />

African Council on Communication Education, 1987), pp. 53-59.<br />

45


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

conglomerates. The comparison with some countries’ gross domestic product is meant to<br />

illustrate the largeness of such global media companies.<br />

Size: Media business compared with some states<br />

Media company Annual sales 115 Country Gross domestic<br />

product (2003) 116<br />

Time Warner US$ 38 billion (2003) Vietnam US$ 39 billion<br />

Disney US$ 31 billion (2004) Slovakia US$ 32 billion<br />

Bertelsmann US$ 21 billion (2003) Kenya + Ug<strong>and</strong>a +<br />

Tanzania altogether<br />

US$ 30 billion<br />

News Corporation US$ 20 billion (2004) Syria US$ 21 billion<br />

In accordance with Wallerstein’s world-system theory, concentration of the mass<br />

media located to so-called cores, is similar to the economic globalisation process. These<br />

patterns of growth, dominance <strong>and</strong> concentration have also emerged at regional <strong>and</strong><br />

national levels as well as in market niches independent of geography. Smaller <strong>and</strong> regional<br />

media conglomerates are intertwined with, influenced by, dependent on, or copies of the<br />

greatest global companies. 117 For these companies spread of press freedom act as spread of<br />

a harmonised practice which is friendly to media business.<br />

When media business as well as media practice are controlled by a few, it can be<br />

claimed that press freedom is used to maintain a hegemony of ruling classes. This critique<br />

is not directed at press freedom itself, but at how manipulative forces influence <strong>and</strong><br />

formulate press freedom to benefit themselves. That is illustrated here through examining<br />

of how elites control the role of media in societies, how market economy influence mass<br />

media to operate <strong>and</strong> think similarly, how mass media support economic globalisation <strong>and</strong><br />

115 Hoover’s Inc.: http://www.hoovers.com/. This is homepage for search in Hoover’s database of 12 million<br />

companies. Search of the actual companies were downloaded 12 th January, 2005.<br />

116 The World Bank, World Development Indicators database: http://devdata.worldbank.org/data-query/<br />

Further comparison: GDP in 2003 in US$ billion: Ug<strong>and</strong>a 6, Tanzania 10, Kenya 14, Denmark 212,<br />

Norway 222, <strong>and</strong> Sweden 301.<br />

117 Herman <strong>and</strong> McChesney, The Global Media, p. 70; <strong>and</strong> Herman, Edward S., “The Media <strong>and</strong> Markets in<br />

the United States” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development<br />

(Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), p. 61.<br />

46


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

create a global culture, the United States’ role, how mass media legitimate <strong>and</strong> stabilise<br />

existing political systems, the NWICO debates <strong>and</strong> effects of new technology.<br />

The role media play in societies can be controlled by the few dominant owners to<br />

protect their interests. In this sense free press is more a myth than reality. 118 When the<br />

mighty <strong>and</strong> powerful appear as strong defenders of press freedom, 119 they defend their<br />

interests given that ruling ideas have always been ideas of the ruling class. 120 An effect is<br />

that despite growth in media channels, sources have been concentrated <strong>and</strong> the range of<br />

views <strong>and</strong> ideas has narrowed. 121 Hence, the growth in the number of media <strong>and</strong> channels<br />

has not resulted in democratic or ideological plurality. 122 In accordance with the owners<br />

interests, an informal filter system for media content ensures that the interests of the cores’<br />

elites prevail. 123 The concept of marketplace of ideas as a basis for press freedom has been<br />

turned to a marketplace for content to attract audiences for advertising purposes. 124 The<br />

‘broadcasting’ has been ‘narrowcasting’, expressed in terms of television. 125<br />

To maintain the present liberal world order, mass media <strong>and</strong> press freedom are<br />

intertwined with free trade <strong>and</strong> democratisation. Thus, the purpose for a free press is to<br />

support markets because social matters have to be solved by markets. 126 In this context a<br />

market based mass media system is regarded as the best protection for freedom of expres-<br />

118<br />

Parenti, Michael, Inventing Reality : The Politics of the Mass Media (New York: St. Martin’s <strong>Press</strong>,<br />

1986), pp. 27, 50 <strong>and</strong> 236-238.<br />

119<br />

For instance Ted Turner, Vice-Chairman of Time Warner in: van der Heijden, Barend <strong>and</strong> Tahzib-Lie,<br />

Bahia, Reflections in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights : A fiftieth Anniversary Anthology (The<br />

Hague: Martinius Nijhoff Publishers, 1998), p. 299.<br />

120<br />

Abubakar, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa”, p. 55.<br />

121<br />

Boyd-Barrett, Oliver, “ ‘Global’ News Agencies” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The<br />

Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage Publications, 1998), p. 33; <strong>and</strong> Paterson, Chris, “Global<br />

Battlefields” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The Globalization of News (New<br />

Delhi/London: Sage Publications, 1998), p. 79.<br />

122<br />

Boyd-Barrett, Oliver, “ ‘Global’ News Agencies”, pp. 19-33.<br />

123 Herring <strong>and</strong> Robinson, “Too polemical or too critical? Chomsky on the study of the news media <strong>and</strong> US<br />

foreign policy”, pp. 554-556; <strong>and</strong> Chomsky, “Commentary: moral truism, empirical evidence, <strong>and</strong> foreign<br />

policy”, pp. 605-620; <strong>and</strong> Allan, Stuart, News Culture (Philadelphia: Open University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp.<br />

57-60.<br />

124 Patterson, “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society”, pp. 253-254.<br />

125 Joyrich: Re-Viewing Reception, pp. 10 <strong>and</strong> 17.<br />

126 Herman, “The Media <strong>and</strong> Markets in the United States”, pp. 61, 70-73 <strong>and</strong> 78.<br />

47


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

sion 127 where media are not accountable to other powers except markets. 128 Extensive<br />

deregulation of media is part of this broader liberal globalisation agenda. 129 A function of<br />

global media is also to integrate new states into the global commerce system. 130 In this way<br />

press freedom has been used as agent for economic globalisation.<br />

Global culture spread by global media is another way of maintaining hegemony. On<br />

one h<strong>and</strong>, globally shared images create a global culture. Among the effects is a shared<br />

notion of what kind of society peoples want in terms of values <strong>and</strong> material needs. On the<br />

other h<strong>and</strong>, like-minded consumers are created, which benefits global markets. 131 Despite<br />

press freedom, more than 99.999% of the world’s population have no access to audiences<br />

because they are receivers <strong>and</strong> not senders in the mass media communication model. 132<br />

Hence, a shared culture, the technology <strong>and</strong> the exclusive access to influence media’s<br />

content, all of these support the existing hegemony. An effect of global culture is also how<br />

mass media’s streamlining of a mass culture results in reduced diversity in the cultural<br />

‘ecology’. Stronger impulses erode the weaker cultures, <strong>and</strong> global mass media are accused<br />

of reducing cultural plurality. 133<br />

Cultural <strong>and</strong> ideological narrowing as an effect of global media is not by accident.<br />

That is, in fact, declared American policy, according to the United States’ Department of<br />

Commerce, which writes:<br />

“Since the founding of the republic, the mass media industry has held a<br />

special place in American society. The products of this industry – films,<br />

video <strong>and</strong> radio programming, <strong>and</strong> recorded music, as well as books,<br />

magazines, <strong>and</strong> newspapers – provide the vehicles through which ideas,<br />

127<br />

Allan, News Culture, p. 49.<br />

128<br />

Okonkwo, Ifeanyi Edward, “Journalists in a Developing Economy” in Okigbo, Charles (ed.), Reporting<br />

Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council for Communication Education, 1994), p. 10.<br />

129<br />

Gunther <strong>and</strong> Mughan, “The Media in Democratic <strong>and</strong> Nondemocratic Regimes”, p. 14.<br />

130<br />

Boyd-Barrett <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, “The Globalization of News”, pp. 3, 8, 10 <strong>and</strong> 15.<br />

131<br />

Real, Exploring Media Culture, pp. 3, 18-20 <strong>and</strong> 148.<br />

132<br />

Boyd-Barrett <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, “The Globalization of News”, p. 11.<br />

133<br />

Oluoch, Fred, “Is <strong>Globalisation</strong> Eroding Our Culture?” in The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group),<br />

news article, 29 th December, 2003; <strong>and</strong> World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty, pp. 129-130.<br />

48


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

images, <strong>and</strong> information are dispersed across the United States <strong>and</strong><br />

throughout the world.” 134<br />

This policy serves both political <strong>and</strong> economic ends in the United States. Due to American<br />

media’s influence on the whole world, all business elites with shared interests benefit from<br />

this policy.<br />

To legitimise <strong>and</strong> stabilise existing political order can be another purpose of press<br />

freedom. A problem that arises is whether these media are true in their criticism or if the<br />

criticism is modest not to jeopardise an existing order that media benefit from. 135 When an<br />

issue is covered <strong>and</strong> opponents <strong>and</strong> experts on all sides are interviewed, the given image is<br />

a critical coverage. In reality, however, arguments which do not fit into the case, or<br />

opponents who are critical are left out of the debate. In that way, the press cultivate debates<br />

within a mainstream framework. Such debates sound critical <strong>and</strong> legitimate decision<br />

processes. In this way an effect of “critical journalism” can be to hide important views.<br />

Hence, the press contributes to support an existing system. Globally, international news<br />

media create similar legitimising conditions for the current world order. 136<br />

When the purpose for press freedom is to maintain the existing system, press<br />

freedom can be subordinated to other considerations. An example of this logic is how press<br />

freedom has been subordinated to regulations to support war on terrorism. It has been<br />

justified by the purpose which is to protect democracy. In that way press freedom has been<br />

subordinated to protection of democracy as a superior purpose. 137<br />

The NWICO debates in the 1970s <strong>and</strong> 80s, illustrate an early resistance to how<br />

global media support rich countries. 138 Among poor countries a sense of being excluded<br />

134<br />

United States’ Department of Commerce, Globalization of the Mass Media, p. 1.<br />

135<br />

Patterson, “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society”, p. 252.<br />

136<br />

Shiller, Robert J., “Irrational Exuberance in the Media” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of<br />

Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies,<br />

2002), pp. 83-86.<br />

137<br />

Elliott, Deni, “Terrorism, Global Journalism <strong>and</strong> the Myth of the Nation State” in Journal of Mass Media<br />

Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004), volume 19, number 1, pp. 42-43.<br />

138<br />

Abubakar, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa”, p. 56.<br />

49


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

from the so-called ‘information age’ emerged. They were worried about how mass media<br />

were lopsided in coverage favouring the rich countries, <strong>and</strong> in accessibility to technical<br />

equipment. UNESCO became the major forum for this debate. UNESCO appointed, in<br />

1976, a commission chaired by Seán MacBride to study ‘the totality of communication<br />

problems in modern societies’. The 1980 UNESCO summit agreed upon proposals from<br />

the commission where some of the poor countries’ concerns were adapted. The result was<br />

a great debate where leading media, especially those in the United States <strong>and</strong> the British,<br />

blamed UNESCO for trying to implement a media policy, where governments should<br />

correct these biases in media. That would be an intervention into the press freedom <strong>and</strong><br />

impossible regarding democratic considerations. In 1983/84 the United States withdrew<br />

from UNESCO, partly due to this conflict. 139<br />

The major proposals of the NWICO debates are not implemented. The process also<br />

illustrate how global media is a stronger political player than poor countries. 140 The ruling<br />

elites both in North <strong>and</strong> South have common interests in media maintaining their<br />

hegemony which makes the dividing line not geography but economic classes in a global<br />

informal network. 141 These are supposed to act as capitalists whether they are from North,<br />

South, are domestic or foreigners. 142<br />

The United States contributed to reduce UNESCO’s role through increasing the<br />

m<strong>and</strong>ate of another UN agency, the <strong>International</strong> Telecommunication Union (ITU), for<br />

shaping the ‘global mass media policy’. 143 With technological development, in particular<br />

how internet put traditional media <strong>and</strong> communication technology together, ITU emerged<br />

as an important actor in media policy. The way the internet is used by terrorists, extremists,<br />

139 Gerbner, George, Mowlana, Hamid <strong>and</strong> Nordenstreng, Kaarle, The Global Media Debate : Its Rise, Fall,<br />

<strong>and</strong> Renewal (New Jersey: Ablex Publishing, 1993), pp. 1-33.<br />

140 Ibid., pp. 25-26.<br />

141<br />

An-na’im, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right”, p. 25.<br />

142<br />

Ochieng, Philip, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong> : An Insider’s View of the Media <strong>and</strong> Politics in Africa (Nairobi:<br />

Initiatives Publishers, 1992), p. 115.<br />

143<br />

Savio, Roberto, “New Information Order Leading Towards ‘Unthink’ ” in The East African (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), 19 th April, 2004.<br />

50


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

organised crime, <strong>and</strong> pornography have been reasons for implementing stronger<br />

international control mechanisms towards that new medium. 144 However, these attempts to<br />

restrict press freedom have not sparked off great debates.<br />

Second is how the development agenda connects media with globalisation. These<br />

debates concern mass media’s support to development in accordance with Western donors’<br />

interests, <strong>and</strong> alliances between media <strong>and</strong> other development actors. Recent changes in<br />

development theories has also changed thinking about relations between media <strong>and</strong><br />

development. Authorities used to decide issues <strong>and</strong> development journalism was supposed<br />

to support the authorities’ efforts. The change is that emphasis is on solutions <strong>and</strong> priorities<br />

emanating from people, <strong>and</strong> media were key to this change of attitude regarding<br />

development. 145<br />

On behalf of Western donors, the World Bank ties political conditions to aid. 146 The<br />

purpose is to develop democracies. However, the World Bank’s definiton of ‘democracy’,<br />

including ‘free market’, ‘privatisation’, <strong>and</strong> ‘civil society’ is a model that benefits global<br />

economic interests dominated by Western companies. ‘Free media’ is expected to<br />

contribute to better democracy. The bank says that a new mind-set will emerge where<br />

governments will underst<strong>and</strong> that it is an agent for its own citizens. India is pointed out as<br />

evidence from the World Bank, because that country has not had any famine since<br />

independence even if there has been poverty <strong>and</strong> drought. The explanation is given to be<br />

the media’s freedom <strong>and</strong> role in good governance in India. 147 Ug<strong>and</strong>a is mentioned as a<br />

successful example of the World Bank’s policy of development. As a force to build the<br />

144<br />

Loader, Brian D., The Governance of Cyberspace : Politics, Technology <strong>and</strong> Global Restructuring<br />

(London: Routledge, 1997), pp. 209-212.<br />

145<br />

Hydén, Göran <strong>and</strong> Leslie, Michael, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa” in Hydén, Göran,<br />

Leslie, Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F., Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction<br />

Publishers, 2002), pp. 4-5.<br />

146<br />

Browne, Stephen, Beyond Aid : From Patronage to Partnership (Aldershot: Ashgate, 1999), pp. 5, 19-27<br />

<strong>and</strong> 169.<br />

147<br />

Stiglitz, “Transparency in Government”, p. 39 (mind-set); <strong>and</strong> Besley, Burgess <strong>and</strong> Prat, “Mass Media <strong>and</strong><br />

Political Accountability”, p. 53 (India); <strong>and</strong> Godbole, Madhav, “Good Governance: A Distant Dream” in<br />

Economic <strong>and</strong> Political Weekly (Mumbai: Sameeksha Trust, 2004), 13 th March, 2004, pp. 1106.<br />

51


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

country, the bank emphasised the media’s role as a part of the Ug<strong>and</strong>an civil society. 148<br />

However, the actual politics on openness into public information, is not an easy process to<br />

establish in the country. 149<br />

An alliance evolved among media, development politicians, NGOs engaged with<br />

development aid, <strong>and</strong> scientists within the field, all who benefit from interactions in<br />

development. Critics claim that the mass media are too much intertwined with the<br />

development sphere to have a critical approach where some distance is necessary. The<br />

development agenda (or ‘development regime’) benefits from the extensive attention from<br />

the mass media to achieve public support. 150 In this way the mass media enter development<br />

politics as an actor, <strong>and</strong> the World Bank emphasises how it is a goal for the development<br />

politics to strengthen this alliance. The goal is to re-establish the role of mass media to<br />

become a partner in the development politics, connected to the agenda of globalisation. 151<br />

Introduction of mass media into development aid policy is controversial. Despite<br />

media’s supports to global democratisation processes there are considered to be a part of<br />

the process where states are weakened <strong>and</strong> the underlying interests are to promote<br />

American values <strong>and</strong> economics. 152 Democratisation is in accordance with the mass<br />

media’s declared social responsibility. Thus, in that concept interests behind the liberal<br />

economic globalisation have found a key to create an alliance with the most honourable<br />

interests within mass media. Whether liberalism is the system which benefit mass media’s<br />

social responsibilty is another debate.<br />

Third are three types of criticism about press freedom that arose from Africa. One<br />

is warning against copying of Western concepts. Second is the attempt to define African<br />

148<br />

Datta-Mitra (ed.), Ug<strong>and</strong>a : Policy, Participation, People, pp. 133 <strong>and</strong> 138-141.<br />

149<br />

Musoke, David, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Publishers Right to Information Bill” in The East African (Nairobi: Nation<br />

Media Group), news article, 19 th April, 2004.<br />

150<br />

Tvedt, Terje, Utviklingshjelp, utenrikspolitikk og makt : Makt- og demokratiutredningen (Oslo:<br />

Gyldendal, 2003), pp. 232-236.<br />

151<br />

Islam, “Into the Looking Glass”, pp. 1-23.<br />

152<br />

Munene, Macharia, “Hazards of Postmodern Colonialism in Kenya”, Draft Paper prepared for Conference on<br />

‘The Political Economy of Kenya’, Oxford University, 27 th – 28 th May, 2004, Oxford, United Kingdom, p. 14.<br />

52


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

versions of press freedom. Finally are claims that concepts of press freedom are among<br />

tools of neo-colonialism.<br />

In claiming that press freedom is a Western concept, critics point out that in the<br />

North, liberal authorities tend to protect citizens at the expense of the community, while in<br />

the South, people tend to be victims of activities that the authorities in the North protect.<br />

Hence, this Northern liberalism, including mass media, is not an appropriate model for the<br />

South. 153 UNESCO, in a worldwide comparative study of media councils <strong>and</strong> codes of<br />

conduct, concluded that Western ideas are not necessarily the basis for press freedom:<br />

“Because the pattern <strong>and</strong> philosophy of mass communication in Third<br />

World countries are not the same as that in many of the developed countries,<br />

the media councils in those countries cannot <strong>and</strong> should not be just carbon<br />

copies of those in the developed world.” 154<br />

This perception was reinforced in a 2002 study by Jennifer Ostini <strong>and</strong> Anthony Y.<br />

H. Fung that concluded that Western concepts <strong>and</strong> values such as a free press were not<br />

transferable. Ostini <strong>and</strong> Fung stated that these values do not work the same way in other<br />

cultures. 155 Western press systems implemented in Africa are even accused of damaging<br />

traditional community societies. Because mass media <strong>and</strong> information systems were used<br />

for control, power imbalances emerged. 156<br />

The Canadian philosopher Marshall McLuhan argued that communication<br />

technology tied the world together in globalisation <strong>and</strong> that technology was not neutral to<br />

values. Changes in communication changed values <strong>and</strong> that there were underlying forces<br />

of media dominance than the content in the media. 157 It was the underlying forces that<br />

African leaders, in newly independent states, felt used the media to control them. That<br />

153 Ochilo, Polycarp Omolo, “Africa : Perspectives for Editorial Independence” in UNESCO, Public Service<br />

Broadcasting <strong>and</strong> Editorial Independence: Strengthening Democratic Voices (Helsinki, Finl<strong>and</strong>: The<br />

Finnish National Commission for UNESCO, 1998), p. 47.<br />

154 Jones, J. Clement, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils : A comparative international study on<br />

professional st<strong>and</strong>ards (Paris: UNESCO <strong>Press</strong>, 1980), p. 56.<br />

155 Brislin, Tom, “Empowerment as a Universal Ethic in Global Journalism” in Journal of Mass Media Ethics<br />

(New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004) volume 19, number 2-2004, p. 132.<br />

156 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 41-45 <strong>and</strong> 60-64; <strong>and</strong> Merrill, Global Journalism, p. 213.<br />

157 Altschull, From Milton to McLuhan, pp. 339-343.<br />

53


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

included use of mass media as agents of cultural imperialism. McLuhan’s theories gave<br />

these leaders a framework to justify control of media to counter what they interpreted as<br />

Western propag<strong>and</strong>a. 158<br />

‘Media is the message’, McLuhan formulated. Some studies have pointed out how<br />

the African oral traditions made up societies different from those in the West based on<br />

written traditions. 159 Many differences between Western <strong>and</strong> traditional African societies<br />

can be traced back to these respectively written <strong>and</strong> oral traditions. 160 When African elites<br />

got education they adopted Western written traditions including use of written media. That<br />

is one of the reasons for growing elite alienation in Africa. 161 Radio <strong>and</strong> TV are more<br />

connected to the oral tradition. 162<br />

Some have attempted to identify a specific African press freedom. In 1962 Tom<br />

Mboya asked: “What is freedom of the press?” His answer was that African press can not<br />

behave like those in London, Paris or New York. After Kenya’s independence in 1963, he<br />

became a member of the cabinet. Mboya emphasised that the local press had a duty to<br />

Africa, <strong>and</strong> that they had to make their own contributions towards Africa. 163 His conclu-<br />

sion on press freedom sounded close to development journalism.<br />

One proposal of African press freedom is called the ‘unfinished agenda’. Emphasis<br />

is on democratisation processes where African actors pursue increased press freedom with<br />

support from the people. The ‘unfinished agenda’ calls for the repeal of anachronistic laws,<br />

many from the colonial days, <strong>and</strong> for free access to information in public administration.<br />

There is call for the creation of independent media councils that would h<strong>and</strong>le disputes<br />

affecting the media, <strong>and</strong> for independent media commissions to ensure balanced coverage<br />

158<br />

Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, pp. 20-22.<br />

159<br />

Ibid., p. 20.<br />

160<br />

Bourgault, Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa, pp. 7-13.<br />

161<br />

Ibid., pp. 21-32.<br />

162<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 44.<br />

163<br />

Mboya, Tom, “Relations Between <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> Governments in Africa” in The Challenge of Nationhood : A<br />

collection of speeches <strong>and</strong> writings (Nairobi: East African Educational Publishers Ltd., 1993 [1970]), p. 137.<br />

54


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

in public owned media. Finally, the most powerful step is pointed out to be politicians<br />

behaviour in practice of press freedom. 164<br />

Another proposal has an underlying premise that African democracies have not yet<br />

been well established. The ideal is yet similar to Western as described in the Universal<br />

Declaration of Human Rights. According to this ideal, the proposal recommends constitut-<br />

ions which guarantee press freedom as well as free access to information. Further, areas of<br />

official secrets have to be reduced <strong>and</strong> journalists should be allowed to keep confidential<br />

sources. To abolish regulations on contempt of parliament, government or the president<br />

<strong>and</strong> leave criminal defamations to civil cases, are pointed out as crucial. 165<br />

<strong>Press</strong> freedom is also accused of being a neo-colonialist instrument to suppress<br />

Africa. <strong>Press</strong> freedom ensures spread of like-minded media <strong>and</strong> a global culture. Hence,<br />

the media are among the means for the hegemon to control consciousness. This is<br />

supported by how the West controls almost all news to <strong>and</strong> from the South. 166 Even news<br />

events within Africa are, in African media, covered by Western news agencies due to lack<br />

of resources to cover “their own” events. 167 The point is that if the oppressed ones can<br />

view themselves as they are viewed by the ruling elites, then they can become their own<br />

policemen. That means that there is no need for a colonial master because Africans are<br />

ruled by the global culture <strong>and</strong> news flows. 168 In this argument global press freedom is<br />

regarded as a necessity to create a web of control.<br />

From the very beginning of Western civilisation, the Greeks portrayed Africa as an<br />

otherness – as ‘barbarians’ <strong>and</strong> ‘savages’. Western science continued to acquire knowledge<br />

about Africa within European philosophical frameworks. Present knowledge about Africa<br />

164<br />

Ogbondah, “Media Laws in Political Transition”, pp. 73-77.<br />

165<br />

Mbome, Peter H., “Aspects of Human Rights in an African Context” in Towards <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> (Harare,<br />

Zimbabwe: Willie Musarurwa Memorial Trust <strong>and</strong> Konrad Adenauer Stiftung, 1996), pp. 42-44.<br />

166<br />

Thiong’o, Ngũgĩ wa, Moving the Centre : The Struggle for Cultural <strong>Freedom</strong>s (Nairobi: East African<br />

Educational Publishers, 1993), pp. 47-52.<br />

167<br />

Lehihi, Masego, “Broadcast Headaches” in Business in Africa (Rivonia, South Africa: Business in Africa<br />

Group, 2004), June 2004, pp. 24-25.<br />

168<br />

Ngũgĩ wa, Moving the Centre, pp. 47-52.<br />

55


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

is therefore mostly European interpretations. 169 This Western creation of Africa dominates<br />

stories about Africa in global media. Images from the colonial era are still alive. These are<br />

stereotypes such as adventures, crocodiles, Tarzan, disasters <strong>and</strong> military coups. Thus,<br />

Africa is transformed to adventures which can be commodities in the global market for<br />

media content. 170 <strong>Press</strong> freedom with social responsibility has not been any hindrance to<br />

exploit <strong>and</strong> stigmatise Africa like this in global markets.<br />

Even Africans themselves are inhibited by this Western philosophy. Attempts to<br />

make an African notion of press freedom, take a critical view to Western values but come<br />

up with similarities to Western practice. In the neo-colonialism debate, it is pointed out<br />

how Africans use Western philosophy to describe Africa <strong>and</strong> how that continue to support<br />

the Western notion of Africa. Within the framework of Western philosophy, it is<br />

impossible to produce unique African concepts. To be liberated from Western political <strong>and</strong><br />

economic dominance, it is necessary to develop specific African thought systems. 171 Thus,<br />

it is a long way to any specific press freedom based on African values.<br />

Another neo-colonial force is ownership. A lot of African media industry is owned<br />

by Western corporates. In addition, almost all content beyond local events are produced by<br />

news agencies, other media providers as well as advertising agencies owned by Western<br />

companies. 172 It is in their interests to maintain the existing media order based on Western<br />

concepts of free markets <strong>and</strong> press freedom.<br />

The West preaches democracy <strong>and</strong> press freedom to Africa, but the democratisation<br />

processes are different. In the West, democracies emerged as a compromise to manage<br />

169<br />

Mudimbe, V. Y., The Idea of Africa (Bloomington: Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1994), pp. 40-41, 71-72 <strong>and</strong><br />

211-212.<br />

170<br />

Hawk, Beverly G. (ed.), Africa’s Media Image (Westport, USA: Praeger Publishers, 1992), pp. 4-16.<br />

171<br />

p’Bitek, Okot, African Religions in Western Scholarship (Nairobi: Kenya Literature Bureau, 1970), pp.<br />

90-91 <strong>and</strong> 102-119.<br />

172<br />

Brislin, Tom, “Empowerment as a Universal Ethic in Global Journalism”, p. 131; <strong>and</strong> Paterson, “Global<br />

Battlefields”, p. 80.<br />

56


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

conflicts between opposite camps. In Africa, the crucial point is to be liberated from an<br />

authoritarian system imposed by European colonial masters. 173<br />

173 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 60-63.<br />

57


Chapter 3: <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian mass media are among the freest in the world. The notion of press freedom<br />

in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia evolved from common democratic philosophies. This chapter has two parts.<br />

First, the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian context is described. History of press freedom as well as reasons<br />

for it are examined, <strong>and</strong> the position of mass media in the societies is presented. Second,<br />

four aspects of press freedom are examined including use of case studies. These are how<br />

media’s role is settled, freedom to gather information, freedom to publish, <strong>and</strong> protection<br />

of journalistic activities.<br />

The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian Context<br />

The democratic, legal <strong>and</strong> cultural traditions in the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries of Norway,<br />

Sweden <strong>and</strong> Denmark are similar. They have similar notions about press freedoms, have<br />

similar history on press freedom <strong>and</strong> it is similar information about mass media in these<br />

societies. 1 Norway is representative of these Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries.<br />

Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

The first newspapers appeared in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia in the 17 th <strong>and</strong> 18 th centuries. The need for<br />

trade communication triggered the emergence of the press whose content was mostly<br />

advertisements <strong>and</strong> business information. Stories about issues in the society were still not<br />

properly developed. A basic principle at that time was that printing <strong>and</strong> publishing were<br />

subject to royal authorisation. The common condition was that the kings’ men ruled over<br />

the content. Otherwise, the printers – the editors of those days – censored themselves<br />

according to the kings’ requests. Laws on sencorship included even the death penalty. 2<br />

1 Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud (Oslo: Statens<br />

Forvaltningstjeneste, 1996), section 3.1. Chapter 3 <strong>and</strong> 4 in this study include a comparative study on media<br />

ethics in the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries.<br />

2 Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 16-23, 27 <strong>and</strong> 45-50.<br />

58


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

The spirit <strong>and</strong> ideals of the Enlightenment, the French Revolution as well as con-<br />

temporary English philosophy, influenced the development of democratic trends in Sc<strong>and</strong>i-<br />

navia. 3 Sweden got a kind of print freedom as early as 1766 4 which is considered as the<br />

world’s oldest constitutional provision for freedom of expression. 5 By 1814, a new Nor-<br />

wegian constitution guaranteed freedom of printing <strong>and</strong> publishing as well as freedom to<br />

do business. From the 1830s, a trend appeared where discourses on matters in society<br />

were moved from the king’s closed rooms to the public sphere. A strong growth of<br />

associations as well as an increasing number of newspapers <strong>and</strong> political pamphlets,<br />

contributed to an institutionalising of public discourse. 6<br />

<strong>Press</strong> freedom became a hot issue as some newspapers in Norway by 1837<br />

committed themselves to protecting their sources of information. Since authorities wanted<br />

to maintain their monopoly of information, the Norwegian government imposed a rule of<br />

confidentiality on its officials in 1845. That step surprised Denmark <strong>and</strong> Sweden because it<br />

was considered as a serious setback for democratisation. There followed debates on ethical<br />

matters with such questions as ‘what is the difference between law <strong>and</strong> morality?’, <strong>and</strong><br />

‘what is privacy?’, or ‘what is of public interests?’ being raised 7 The debate started a<br />

continuing process that shapes the press’ code of conduct.<br />

The next phase was the establishment of press associations which institutionalised<br />

instruments that promoted the interests of the press. The numerous organisations indicates<br />

that ‘interests of the press’ were not one coherent subject. These organisations had<br />

different aims, such as editorial interests (in contradiction to business), education <strong>and</strong> terms<br />

of employment as well as political <strong>and</strong> regional purposes. The variety of media<br />

3 Ibid., pp. 26, 38-39 <strong>and</strong> 66.<br />

4 Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 2003:30 : Ny offentlighetslov (Oslo:<br />

Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 2003), section 4.2.2.<br />

5 Ogundimu, Folu Folarin, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa” in Hydén, Göran, Leslie,<br />

Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F., Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction Publishers,<br />

2002), p. 218.<br />

6 Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 18 <strong>and</strong> 31-37.<br />

7 Ibid., pp. 45-50.<br />

59


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

organisations are today streamlined in a cooperating system. They include unions of<br />

journalists, association of editors, owner’s associations, <strong>and</strong> other interest organisations.<br />

They all emphasise different aspects of press freedom. 8<br />

Education has been considered crucial for press freedom. An educated journalist or<br />

editor is supposed to behave more professionally <strong>and</strong> resist external influence better than<br />

an uneducated one. In Norway, the first dem<strong>and</strong> for editorial education was proposed in<br />

1875, <strong>and</strong> the first school of journalism was established in 1919. However, the first public<br />

school of journalism was not a reality until 1965. 9<br />

The European Convention on Human Rights, in paricular article 10, is important for<br />

the legal framework for press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. This Convention has harmonised<br />

the legal practice in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia with Europe. 10<br />

Beyond progress in legal environment, two other movements promoted press<br />

freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. First was the independence <strong>and</strong> movement for editorial<br />

independence to resist pressure from the influence of external interests, the King or<br />

government officials. From around 1900 independence from government became the ideal<br />

to be pursued by editors. Several attempts to ensure the principle came to an end in 1953<br />

when a formal declaration of the editor’s independence was made between The Associ-<br />

ation of Norwegian Editors <strong>and</strong> The Norwegian Newspaper’s Owners Association. In<br />

Denmark a similar declaration was adopted at about the same time. Sweden passed laws to<br />

ensure freedom of expression. 11<br />

After 1970 Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian newspapers liberated themselves from political parties, 12<br />

but not from the owners whose influence continued to determine media content. One way<br />

out was to have many owners so that if one newspaper is biased in favour of one camp,<br />

8<br />

Ibid., pp. 60, 74-77, 84-88 <strong>and</strong> 115-118.<br />

9<br />

Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 91-93.<br />

10<br />

Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 136-140 <strong>and</strong> 1002-1008.<br />

11<br />

Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 83 <strong>and</strong> 96.<br />

12 Ibid., p. 118.<br />

60


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

another view would emerge in another newspaper. That fits in with the Associate Justice of<br />

the United States’ Supreme Court, Oliver Wendell Holmes Jr.’s, concept of ‘marketplace<br />

of ideas’ where competing ideas would result in a public discourse where the best idea<br />

would receive support. 13 Such an approach has strong support in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> is an<br />

important reason for politics which stimulate a wide range of different media. 14<br />

Second are formalised codes of conduct that support a self-regulating regime where<br />

“media rule media”. These are based on the assumption that if the media behave<br />

responsibly, <strong>and</strong> in accordance with the ideals of social responsibility, government would<br />

not need to interfere with media operations. Sweden, in 1874, was the first country in the<br />

world to forge a system of formalised codes of conduct within the press, 15 <strong>and</strong> founded a<br />

media council in 1916. 16 Norway followed by 1929. 17 In Denmark, this Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian style<br />

of self-regulation is organised within a legal framework for a responsible press including<br />

provisions for judicial action. However, Sweden <strong>and</strong> Norway do not have such laws. 18<br />

Media’s role in societies, <strong>and</strong> hence the purpose of press freedom, has got its<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian notion. A feature of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian democracies has been extensive welfare<br />

systems. In Sweden this philosophy is termed ‘the people’s home’. Such a system has been<br />

based on high level of union memberships <strong>and</strong> myriads of other organisations taking care<br />

of people’s interests in a highly organised civil society. A culture of collective interests has<br />

been dominant. In this way citizens have had a power base towards economic elites.<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media reflect these power structures. Patterns in civil society <strong>and</strong> collective<br />

interests have given the pattern in media which then have given the prevailing opinion of<br />

13<br />

Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 58-60.<br />

14<br />

Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 116-118.<br />

15<br />

Herbert, John, Practising Global Journalism, pp. 68-69.<br />

16<br />

Ahuja, Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism, p. 231.<br />

17<br />

Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 78.<br />

18<br />

Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud, sections 3.1<br />

<strong>and</strong> 3.3.1.<br />

61


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

media’s role in societies as supporter of ‘the people’s home’ notion of democracy. 19<br />

Present forces in economic globalisation are a serious challenge to this kind of media<br />

supported welfare system. 20<br />

Commercialisation of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media has followed patterns common to other<br />

Western countries. Popularisation of contents <strong>and</strong> restructuring of ownerships are among<br />

the results. An effect of popularisation is how content has to follow commercial logic <strong>and</strong><br />

achieve market objectives rather than political objectives. An effect of altered ownerships<br />

is liberation from political owners only to develop new ties to owners with commercial<br />

purposes. Despite media’s strong bonds to traditional Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian democratic values, a<br />

shift of power has taken place in newsrooms. Owners <strong>and</strong> managers adapt tough economic<br />

criteria that reduce the power of journalists to represent citizens. 21 In this way commercial<br />

interests have grown in importance as framework for press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia.<br />

Reasons for <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

There are three given reasons for the growth of press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. First is the<br />

search for truth. Second is democracy. Third is love of individual liberty.<br />

Firstly, truth is a good in itself, or truth is a means to achieve other goods. The<br />

search for the truth, including discourse among competing truths, is emphasised as a pur-<br />

pose for freedom of expression in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. The belief that the truth will win is<br />

widespread in the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries. Therefore, even wrong expressions <strong>and</strong> opinions<br />

are protected in public discourses. 22<br />

Secondly, democratic reasons for press freedom have been argued in two ways in<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. On one h<strong>and</strong>, people need free information to be empowered to play their<br />

19 Dahlgren, Peter, “Media <strong>and</strong> power transitions in a small country: Sweden” in Curran, James <strong>and</strong> Park,<br />

Myung-Jin, De-Westernizing Media Studies (London: Routledge, 2000), pp. 252-253.<br />

20 Ibid., pp. 262-263.<br />

21 Ibid., pp. 251 <strong>and</strong> 257-258.<br />

22 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 37-55.<br />

62


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

individual role in a democracy. If people decide leadership by ballots, they need free<br />

information to select <strong>and</strong> vote for c<strong>and</strong>idates. Such a system trusts in the enlightened <strong>and</strong><br />

rational man. On the other h<strong>and</strong>, a free press will be the channel of information to the<br />

leaders. Media’s critical attention to a wide range of issues ensure that the leaders are well<br />

informed about society’s needs. Since freedom of expression is meant to move conflicts<br />

from use of force <strong>and</strong> violence to debates, the youth in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia are raised <strong>and</strong><br />

socialised to be democratic <strong>and</strong> to consider the interests of the minority. A free <strong>and</strong> open<br />

press may be means to ensure the interests of the minorities, to ensure plurality. In these<br />

circumstances a free press is supposed to legitimatise democratic decision-making<br />

processes. 23<br />

Thirdly, individual liberty is a basic value in a liberal society. Such an equal right to<br />

freedom of expression was the major concern when constitutions were written, influenced<br />

by French <strong>and</strong> English philosophy. Later, the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian societies changed. Practice in<br />

the countries’ Supreme Courts as well as in the European Commission <strong>and</strong> Court of<br />

Human Rigths indicates that democratic arguments are superior to individual liberal rights.<br />

Therefore, political expressions are supposed to be protected more than, for instance,<br />

information about privacy. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia there is debate about balancing public interests<br />

with privacy. 24<br />

<strong>Press</strong> freedom is protected from at least three forces. These are interference from<br />

government, external private forces, <strong>and</strong> the owner’s commercial interests. In searching for<br />

freedom from such forces, a paradox has arisen. Editors sought alliance with legislators to<br />

increase the legal protection of editorial independence from their own owners. Another<br />

effort to reduce owners’ influence is to ensure spreading of media ownerships. 25<br />

23 Ibid., pp. 55-80.<br />

24 Ibid., pp. 80-87.<br />

25 Ibid., pp. 604-611; <strong>and</strong> Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 115-118.<br />

63


Mass Media in the Societies<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are worldwide ranked at the top in many ways. Indicators<br />

which put these countries at the global top level include use of media, circulation, spread<br />

of media equipment <strong>and</strong> technological infrastructure. 26 Broadcasting in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia<br />

includes private commercial channels as well as public radio <strong>and</strong> TV stations both at local<br />

<strong>and</strong> national levels. The public broadcasters have long-established traditions <strong>and</strong> maintain<br />

a strong position in all these countries. The spread or use of radio <strong>and</strong> TV may be<br />

illustrated by the following table:<br />

Number of radio <strong>and</strong> TV receivers per 1000 inhabitants (1996) 27<br />

Country TV Radio<br />

Denmark 594 1145<br />

Norway 462 917<br />

Sweden 519 932<br />

There is extensive spread of print media in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. Concerning newspapers,<br />

the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are ranked with the top in the world. It is common to read more<br />

than one newspaper a day.<br />

Spread of daily newspapers (1996) 28<br />

Country Number of Total Circulation per<br />

titles circulation 1000 inhabitants<br />

Denmark 37 1,628,000 311<br />

Norway 83 2,578,000 590<br />

Sweden 94 4,499,000 445<br />

distinguished.<br />

Another print media, books, is an area where the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are<br />

26<br />

UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000 (Paris: UNESCO, 1999), pp. 262-<br />

271.<br />

27<br />

United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997 (New York: United Nations, 2000), table<br />

18, pp. 130-137.<br />

28<br />

Ibid., table 16, pp. 117-123. More recent data are available, these are used to be comparable with East<br />

Africa below. However, these figures have been stable over time.<br />

64


Number of new published book titles (1996) 29<br />

Country New book titles Titles per<br />

1000 inhabitants<br />

Denmark 12,352 2.3<br />

Norway 6,900 1.6<br />

Sweden 13,496 1.6<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Internet <strong>and</strong> telecommunications have been widespread in all kinds of daily life in<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. Figures indicate that only neighbouring Finl<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> the United States have a<br />

more extensive use of internet in the world than Norway, Sweden <strong>and</strong> Denmark. 30<br />

Journalistic capacity indicates the media’s potential power in society. The numbers<br />

of practicing journalists <strong>and</strong> editors in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia are in Denmark 11,000, 31 in Norway<br />

8,000, 32 <strong>and</strong> in Sweden 15,000. 33 Hence, in statistical terms, each journalist has in average<br />

to watch about 550 citizens. 34<br />

Four Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia<br />

The growth of press freedom can be examined in four ways. First is the role of the press<br />

itself. Second is the process of news gathering. Third is publishing. And fourth is the<br />

protection of journalistic activities.<br />

29<br />

Ibid., table 15, pp. 111-116.<br />

30<br />

UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, p. 271.<br />

31<br />

The Danish Union of Journalists, “Om DJ” (København: The Danish Union of Journalists, 2005), at:<br />

http://www.journalistforbundet.dk/sw101.asp, downloaded 11 th March, 2005. The figures here are<br />

calculated similar to the figures for Norway <strong>and</strong> Sweden. Denmark’s definition of ‘journalist’ is wider than<br />

in Norway <strong>and</strong> Sweden.<br />

32<br />

Estimate made by Jahn-Arne Olsen, Secretary-General of The Norwegian Union of Journalists, in<br />

correspondance by e-mail received 3 rd March, 2005.<br />

33<br />

Estimate made by Hans Kilsved, Secretary-General of The Swedish Union of Journalists, in<br />

correspondance by e-mail received 3 rd March, 2005.<br />

34<br />

Number of inhabitants from: Microsoft, Encarta Interactive World Atlas 2000 (Redmond, Washington:<br />

Microsoft, 1999), CD-rom.<br />

65


Role of the <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have long-established democracies that support the develop-<br />

ment of media’s free <strong>and</strong> extensive role in society. Both the governments <strong>and</strong> the media<br />

have contributed to the development.<br />

At a constitutional level the principle is that anyone is free to publish without any<br />

permission in advance. That was formulated in Article 100 in the Norwegian Constitution<br />

of 1814. 35 Sweden has similar constitution but a more extensive legal system around these<br />

instruments. 36 Another constitutional regulation which supports free media within the<br />

private sector is the freedom for anyone to run a business. 37<br />

There are many regulations of publishing activities. These include the system of<br />

licence for radio or TV broadcasting because of limited access to frequences. Due to this<br />

scantiness of frequence numbers, politics <strong>and</strong> commercial interests entered in the<br />

distribution of licences. The politics have been to ensure that the airwaves bring cultural<br />

diversity, local content, <strong>and</strong> many voices in the democratic processes. The economic value<br />

of a frequency has sometimes been an object of charges or taxes as well. In this way, the<br />

licence system for broadcast media has been an instrument where the authorities decide a<br />

framework for content <strong>and</strong> economic conditions. Due to the democratic reasons behind<br />

these politics, such regulations are considered to be in accordance with the freedom of<br />

expression. 38 All the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have strong public broadcasters which have<br />

dominant positions in TV as well as radio. These operate within a framework decided by<br />

cultural politics. The public broadcasters are mainly funded by public resources.<br />

35<br />

Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 35 <strong>and</strong> 95-96.<br />

36<br />

Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 96.<br />

37<br />

Ibid., p. 35.<br />

38<br />

Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 47 <strong>and</strong> 611-632.<br />

66


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have been among the latest in the West to liberalise broadcasting<br />

<strong>and</strong> allow private actors in radio <strong>and</strong> TV. 39<br />

Taxes <strong>and</strong> subsidies have been instruments to support media activities in Sc<strong>and</strong>i-<br />

navia. In Norway, about US$ 40 million are granted annually as subsidies to economically<br />

weak newspapers. 40 Further, newspapers are exempted from value added tax. The same is<br />

the case in Sweden where newspapers have value added tax at a reduced level. The media<br />

as an industry benefit from several economic arrangements which support media to grow<br />

stronger. The reason behind such politics is to ensure plurality <strong>and</strong> independence for the<br />

media as vehicles for democratic processes. 41 Similar reasons are given for regulations of<br />

media which are intended to maintain plaurality <strong>and</strong> prevent concentration of ownership. 42<br />

The press itself is a major actor in the society. The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media, by<br />

performance, gain public support which in turn increases press freedom. At the moment<br />

there are two main means for strengthening the independence. First, is continuous pursuit<br />

of binding declarations <strong>and</strong> legal instruments that protect the independence. The<br />

Norwegian declaration “Rights <strong>and</strong> Duties of the Editor” from 1953 about the editor’s<br />

independence, has achieved a legal precedent. 43 Sweden has similar regulations by law. 44<br />

Second, the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media live up to the self-regulation doctrine of ‘let the<br />

press correct the press’. 45 Therefore, media prefer to solve conflicts through media councils<br />

rather than in court. The courts are considered as government instruments, <strong>and</strong> media<br />

prefer that such an act from authorities should be reserved for cases they cannot solve by<br />

39<br />

Dahlgren, “Media <strong>and</strong> power transitions in a small country: Sweden”, p. 258.<br />

40<br />

Journalisten, “<strong>Press</strong>estøtten kuttes fem prosent” in Journalisten (Oslo: Norsk Journalistlag), news article,<br />

11 th May, 2004. The article is also published at:<br />

http://www.journalisten.no/artikkel.asp?GUID={67CC731C-BD7D-442F-9573-<br />

4E4F1CFF8C58}&kategoriID=3&temaID=245, downloaded 8 th March, 2005.<br />

41<br />

Correspondance with Nils Øy, Secretary-General in the Norwegian Association of Editors, e-mail received<br />

9 th March, 2005.<br />

42<br />

Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 689-691.<br />

43<br />

Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 80 <strong>and</strong> 83.<br />

44 Ibid., p. 96.<br />

45 Ibid., pp. 38-39 <strong>and</strong> 116-118.<br />

67


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

themselves. 46 The “law” for these media councils are codes of conduct usually made by the<br />

media themselves. Among many detailed descriptions, the superior value of independence<br />

is emphasised in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. For instance, as quoted from article 1.1 in the Code of Ethics<br />

of the Norwegian <strong>Press</strong>: “A free, independent press is among the most important<br />

institutions in a democratic society.” 47 Of course, competing interests emerge between the<br />

press, authorities as well as other actors. These are typically actors mentioned in a bad light<br />

by the media. Such conflicts are usually left to the press’ own organs or as civil lawsuits. 48<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have called attention to the institution of ombudsman in<br />

media. The idea is to have the ombudsman as an independent mediator to channel conflicts<br />

between the public or single persons on one side <strong>and</strong> media actors on the other. It is<br />

supposed to be an institution which strengthens media ethics in an era where other forces<br />

place media’s conduct under pressure. 49<br />

The first media ombudsman emerged in Sweden in 1969 as a result of sharp debates<br />

on media ethics. Swedish media’s response was to create an ombudsman to ensure<br />

confidence in the established self-regulation system. His task was to assist complainants in<br />

their cases against media, mediate, or take cases to the media council. However, the<br />

Swedish ombudsman is appointed in a way that the Swedish government’s justice<br />

ombudsman is involved. So, the government has a stake into the press’ self-regulation<br />

system in Sweden. 50<br />

Good experiences from Sweden’s media ombudsman resulted in a call for a similar<br />

one in Norway. The Norwegian government initiated a study in 1996 that came up with a<br />

proposal. An ombudsman was supposed to work within the media’s self-regulation system,<br />

46 Ibid., pp. 76-79, 96-97 <strong>and</strong> 112.<br />

47 The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom : Etiske normer for pressen (Oslo: The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong><br />

Association, 1999). This is published in English version at the web-site: Databank for European Codes of<br />

Journalism Ethics: http://www.uta.fi/ethicnet/ under the link “Norway”, downloaded 22 nd July, 2004.<br />

48 Correspondance with Øy, e-mail received 28 th January, 2005.<br />

49 Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud, chapter 2.<br />

50 Ibid., section 3.2.<br />

68


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

<strong>and</strong> yet within a new legal framework <strong>and</strong> with some strings to authorities. 51 Even though<br />

the idea itself was welcomed, voices both inside <strong>and</strong> outside the press rose against such a<br />

government interference. The Norwegian government then decided not to initiate a media<br />

ombudsman <strong>and</strong> emphasised media self-regulation. 52 However, even if such a media<br />

ombudsman was considered not to be in accordance with press freedom, this government<br />

initiated process resulted in other reforms where the media itself improved the self-<br />

regulation system. 53<br />

Gathering Information<br />

The right to have information belongs to people, not to media. Due to the press’ social<br />

responsibility it is supposed to serve public with information. This democratic right is the<br />

reason why the right to information is included in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian constitutions. 54 Access to<br />

information concerns both ethics <strong>and</strong> law as well as practical circumstances.<br />

The Code of Ethics of the Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> guides the process acquiring<br />

information. In Norway, it is emphasised as a principle that the press have to protect the<br />

access to official documents. Sources should be identifiable as long as identification does<br />

not come into conflict with the need to protect the sources. Journalists have to be critical in<br />

the choice of sources. Use of anonymous sources implies a special need for critical<br />

evaluation. The press should protect its sources. Such a protection is a basic principle in a<br />

free society <strong>and</strong> ensures the access to essential information. As a main rule, unpublished<br />

material should not be divulged to third parties. The press may show consideration for<br />

people who cannot be expected to be aware of the effect that their statements may have.<br />

51 Ibid., chapter 5.<br />

52 Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Ot prp nr 77 (1996-97) : Om lov om endringer i kringkastingsloven<br />

(Medieetikk mv) (Oslo: Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 1997), sections 4.2-4.4.<br />

53 Correspondance with Øy, e-mail received 16 th February, 2005.<br />

54 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 55 <strong>and</strong> 78; <strong>and</strong> Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, p. 191.<br />

69


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Journalist may only use hidden cameras or microphones or false identity under special<br />

circumstances. 55<br />

The essence in this ethics is the principle of openness <strong>and</strong> open access to gather<br />

information, respect for the sources as well as protection of anonymous sources. Gradually,<br />

parts of this conduct of the press has been implemented into law. The principle of openness<br />

come up in philosophy of the Enlightenment, <strong>and</strong> was a matter in the struggle for press<br />

freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia already in the 18 th <strong>and</strong> 19 th century. In Norway, several processes,<br />

setbacks <strong>and</strong> progresses resulted in a law in 1970 where openness in civil service became<br />

the main rule. 56<br />

The need to protect the press’ confidential sources started as an ethical issue, <strong>and</strong><br />

then became the law in Norway, however, not as absolute as in the codes of conduct. 57 In<br />

Sweden legislators have gone farther <strong>and</strong> made the protection of sources complete.<br />

Regardless of the national laws, the European Court of Human Rights has in accordance<br />

with the European Convention on Human Rights article 10 established a strong legal<br />

protection of such sources. 58<br />

A question in the NWICO debate was ‘who is permitted to operate as journalist?’<br />

Many countries make formal requirements <strong>and</strong> government authorities issue press cards as<br />

license to be a journalist. 59 In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, authorities do not present requirements to<br />

media practitioners <strong>and</strong> the press’ own organs issue press cards. 60 It is not m<strong>and</strong>atory to<br />

have press card in order to operate as journalists. It is supposed that about 10% of<br />

journalists in Norway are not organised in the Union of Journalists <strong>and</strong> operate without<br />

55 The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom, cut from articles 1.3 <strong>and</strong> 3.1-3.10.<br />

56<br />

Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 115.<br />

57<br />

Ibid., pp. 98-99.<br />

58<br />

Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 78 <strong>and</strong> 341-344.<br />

59<br />

Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, pp. 192-193.<br />

60 Eide, Den redigerende makt, pp. 92-94.<br />

70


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

press card. 61 The selection <strong>and</strong> control of staff <strong>and</strong> other inputs is solely left to the editors<br />

who operate within a framework of their own editorial policy <strong>and</strong> collective agreements.<br />

Education <strong>and</strong> professionalising of journalism is another way to improve quality of<br />

fact finding. Most Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian journalists have academic degrees. 62 Journalists in<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia have had to raise professional st<strong>and</strong>ards due to a highly educated public,<br />

competition, a complex society, <strong>and</strong> the growth in information flows from professional<br />

information officials feeding the journalists.<br />

In principle, the public administration’s documents in Norway, with some<br />

exceptions, are open to anyone. That has been law since 1970. In practice, the press <strong>and</strong><br />

officials of public authorities have many disputes about limitations <strong>and</strong> single cases. The<br />

purpose for openness is to create transparency. The law’s basic principle is that public<br />

administration’s documents are public as long as no exception in law has been made.<br />

Neither releasing of information is restricted to specific officials. 63 A government<br />

appointed committee which has carried out a study <strong>and</strong> new proposals, emphasises four<br />

reasons for the principle of openness: It is a way to ensure <strong>and</strong> maintain democracy,<br />

transparency to check public administration, public’s legal safeguards as well as admini-<br />

stration as a source of information. The first two, democracy <strong>and</strong> transparency, are pointed<br />

out as most important. 64 Documents exempted from publicity are mostly internal<br />

documents, information of a sensitive private nature, competition’s sensitive information<br />

(for instance during tender processes) as well as information concerning national interests<br />

or security. 65<br />

61 rd<br />

Correspondance with Olsen, e-mail received 3 March, 2005.<br />

62<br />

Ibid., pp. 92-94.<br />

63<br />

Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 2003:30 : Ny offentlighetslov, section<br />

3.2.3.<br />

64<br />

Ibid., sections 4.2.1-4.2.4.<br />

65 Ibid., section 3.2.5.<br />

71


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

The problem is the law’s ambit which is supposed to be all public authorities at all<br />

levels where very few organs are exempted. Earlier, sectors of limited openness have been<br />

social authorities such as offices for child welfare, social security benefits, <strong>and</strong> health care<br />

as well as authorities of foreign affairs <strong>and</strong> the military. 66<br />

Public sectors in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are in a process of privatisation. Typically,<br />

public functions are reorganised into publicly owned limited companies or similarly run<br />

along the principles of private sector, sometimes even in competition with other private<br />

actors. Outsourcing of public services that can be provided by private actors is encouraged.<br />

The purposes are to increase the efficiency of public service <strong>and</strong> to reduce size of public<br />

sector. But the law’s principle of openness is not valid towards private sector. Therefore,<br />

privatisation results in reduced access to public information concerning crucial processes<br />

in a democratic society. 67<br />

The press complains over how privatisation has reduced openness in public<br />

authorities’ activities. In many single disputes, the decision is that publicly owned<br />

companies have to accept public involvement even if these are organised as limited<br />

companies, similar to private companies. 68 The actual proposal is to enlarge the scope of<br />

openness to include private actors which are performing authority on behalf of the public<br />

administration. The purpose is to maintain the principle of openness despite privatisation. 69<br />

Compared to Norway, the scope of openness is larger in Swedish administration, <strong>and</strong><br />

smaller in Denmark. 70<br />

66 Ibid., section 3.3.7.<br />

67 Ibid., sections 6.2-6.4.<br />

68 Ibid., section 6.2, in particular footnote 4.<br />

69 Ibid., sections 6.8 <strong>and</strong> 6.9.2.2.<br />

70 Ibid., sections 6.5.1 <strong>and</strong> 6.5.3.<br />

72


Publishing<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

This aspect about about freedom to select information <strong>and</strong> decide publishing has<br />

traditionally been at the core of press freedom. 71 This is the moment where information<br />

moves from few individuals to the public. So, information is transformed to be a force in<br />

society. In essence, it is media’s freedom to operate independently on publishing without<br />

external interference <strong>and</strong> only to be limited by democratic laws <strong>and</strong> ethics. 72<br />

Matters in conflict with freedom of expression can be categorised into national <strong>and</strong><br />

collective interests as well as private <strong>and</strong> individual interests. The clearest national interest<br />

is national security. Despite extensive press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, information that is<br />

injurious to national security is protected by law against publishing. In Norway, despite<br />

print freedom, police may confiscate all the copies immediately if they consider the content<br />

to be injurious to national security. Then, a court will have to confirm if the decision was<br />

right or not. 73<br />

The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian notion of ‘democratic society’ includes some collective values.<br />

Due to tolerance towards minorities, some discriminatory expressions are prohibited.<br />

These are such as expressions toward particular groups as religious, ethnic, or sexual<br />

minorities as well as racial expressions. However, expressions have to be made public <strong>and</strong><br />

be quite harsh before these can be an offence. Further, the legal systems have restrictions<br />

against blasphemy, pornography <strong>and</strong> regulations of commercial messages. 74<br />

Private interests in conflict with publicity may be institutional as well as individual.<br />

A typical private institutional interest may be to protect a business from publicity that<br />

damages its reputation causing negative economic consequences. For individuals, bad<br />

71 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, p. 345.<br />

72 Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, pp. 193-195.<br />

73 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 595-600.<br />

74 Ibid., pp. 486-583.<br />

73


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

publicity may typically insult their privacy, reputation or injure their future possibilities. 75<br />

The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian laws make a balance between the interests of transparency in the society<br />

<strong>and</strong> such private interests. 76 Typically, the press is allowed to give more details in matters<br />

of public interests compared with matters of private nature. 77 All these restrictions have<br />

resulted in the concept of ‘relative protection of freedom of expression’. The point is that<br />

the laws make a distinction between expressions which deserve to be protected according<br />

to democratic values, <strong>and</strong> those expressions which do not need such a protection. 78<br />

The codes of conduct are more detailed than laws. Typical Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian rules of<br />

publishing can be found in the Code of Ethics of the Norwegian <strong>Press</strong>. The press is suppo-<br />

sed to be fair <strong>and</strong> thoughtful, <strong>and</strong> make plain what is factual information <strong>and</strong> what is com-<br />

ment. It has to respect a person’s character <strong>and</strong> identity, privacy, race, nationality or belief<br />

<strong>and</strong> not draw attention to personal or private aspects if they are irrelevant. Headlines, intro-<br />

ductions <strong>and</strong> leads have to be in accordance with the text. Presumption of guilt in crime<br />

<strong>and</strong> court reporting should be avoided. It has to be clear that the question of guilt has not<br />

been decided until the sentecne is legally pronounced. It is good press conduct to report the<br />

final result of court proceedings which have been reported earlier. The press should consid-<br />

er how reports on accidents <strong>and</strong> crime may affect the victims <strong>and</strong> next-of-kin. Victims or<br />

missing persons should not be identified before next-to-kin have been informed. In court<br />

<strong>and</strong> crime reporting names <strong>and</strong> pictures <strong>and</strong> other items of definite identification have to be<br />

used with caution, <strong>and</strong> only when this is necessary to meet just <strong>and</strong> fair dem<strong>and</strong>s for<br />

information. As a general rule, the identity of children should not be disclosed in sensitive<br />

cases. The press should in general never give any mention to suicide <strong>and</strong> attempted suicide.<br />

The credibility of the journalistic photograph as documentation has to be protected. If<br />

75<br />

Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, pp. 201-203.<br />

76<br />

Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 740-741.<br />

77<br />

Ibid., p. 771.<br />

78<br />

Ibid., p. 84.<br />

74


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

incorrect information is published, it must be corrected <strong>and</strong>, if necessary, an apology made<br />

as soon as possible. Those subjected to attacks should, as soon as possible, have the<br />

opportunity to reply. Those subjected to strong accusations shall, if possible, have the<br />

opportunity to simultaneous reply. Debates, criticism <strong>and</strong> dissemination of news must not<br />

be hampered by parties being unwilling to make comments. 79<br />

All Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have media councils to deal with such conflicts. The<br />

system insists that if a medium loses a case, it has to publish the media council’s<br />

statement. 80 In addition it is possible to prosecute media, <strong>and</strong> this leads to the problem of<br />

self-censorship as the editor seeks to avoid cases in court. 81 In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia plurality within<br />

media reduces such an effect. 82<br />

There is also concern over the balance between published details <strong>and</strong> the media’s<br />

social responsibility in crime reporting. The Norwegian code of conduct article 4.7 points<br />

out the rule that names <strong>and</strong> pictures <strong>and</strong> other details of identification in court <strong>and</strong> crime<br />

reporting have to be used with caution, <strong>and</strong> only when this is necessary to meet just <strong>and</strong><br />

fair dem<strong>and</strong>s for information. Judgements by the Media Council indicate where the bar is<br />

set in Norwegian practice. In one case the newspaper Nordlys reported a case of domestic<br />

violence including details of the incident <strong>and</strong> about the couple. Beyond the described<br />

course of events the complaints were concerned about publishing of personal information.<br />

Even if they were anonymous, almost everyone in their home district would identify them.<br />

In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia the right of individuals to be protected from public reporting is highly<br />

regarded. Despite the attempt to conceal the identity of the couple, the Media Council’s<br />

79<br />

The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom, cut from articles 4.1-4.15.<br />

80<br />

Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud, section 3.1.<br />

81<br />

UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, pp. 74-75.<br />

82<br />

Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 604-611; <strong>and</strong> Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU<br />

1996:12 : Medieombud, section 2.1.2.<br />

75


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

conclusion was that the article “contains too many identifying details”. The right to be<br />

anonymous despite the press’ right to expose such a problem was emphasised. 83<br />

Another case was where the newspapers Agderposten <strong>and</strong> Verdens Gang published<br />

a picture of a gang of boys exercising v<strong>and</strong>alism. The boys were pictured from the back.<br />

However, when the parents recognised their own boys who were 12-13 years old, they<br />

went to the police <strong>and</strong> solved the matter. Despite the newspapers’ noble purposes, <strong>and</strong> the<br />

published picture’s contribution to solve the issue, the Media Council stated that the<br />

picture gave one of the boys an unnecessary additional burden due to his tender age. 84<br />

The point formulated by the Media Council is, however, that crime is a public mat-<br />

ter. Yet, as a main rule the culprit has a right of anonymity. The purpose is to subject crime<br />

to public debate without infringement of privacy. The identity tends to be published in the<br />

most serious cases, at a late phase in the process such as after judgement in a court, or if<br />

the person is already known to the public. The nuances between practices in the<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries are that Sweden is most modest in publishing names, while<br />

Denmark exercises least protection of privacy. 85<br />

Protection of Journalistic Activities<br />

In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, there are some arrangements to protect the press to freely perform its<br />

activities. It concerns how authorities treat the press’ activities, protection from private<br />

actors threats, <strong>and</strong> the editorial department’s independence from owners’ interference.<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media’s approach emphasises the editor’s independence. This quote<br />

from the Norwegian declaration “Rights <strong>and</strong> Duties of the Editor” points out this position:<br />

83 <strong>Press</strong>ens Faglige Utvalg (Norwegian Media Council), judgement in case 107/2004. Parts: NN <strong>and</strong> XX<br />

against Nordlys (newspaper). Concluding date: 24th August, 2004. Available at: http://81.0.149.237/pfu/<br />

84 <strong>Press</strong>ens Faglige Utvalg (Norwegian Media Council), judgements in: Case 117/2003. Parts: NN against<br />

Agderposten (newspaper). And case 118/2004. Parts: NN against Verdens Gang (newspaper). Both cases<br />

at concluding date: 16 th December, 2003. Available at: http://81.0.149.237/pfu/<br />

85 Omdal, Sven Egil, “Menn som slår, kommer i avisen” in Stavanger Aftenblad (Stavanger, Norway:<br />

Stavanger Aftenblad ASA), 15 th January, 2005.<br />

76


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

“[…] An editor is expected to share the fundamental views <strong>and</strong> aims of<br />

his/her publication. But within this framework the editor is entitled to a free<br />

<strong>and</strong> independent leadership of the editorial department <strong>and</strong> editorial work<br />

<strong>and</strong> full freedom to shape the opinions of the paper even if they in single<br />

matters are not shared by the publisher or the board. […] The editor carries<br />

the judicial responsibility for the paper, <strong>and</strong> has the full <strong>and</strong> personal<br />

responsibility for the contents of the newspaper. The editor directs <strong>and</strong> is<br />

responsible for the activities of the members of the editorial department <strong>and</strong><br />

is the link between them <strong>and</strong> the publisher/board.” 86<br />

This agreement between the Association of Norwegian Editors <strong>and</strong> the Norwegian Media<br />

Business Association, makes a distinction between the editorial work <strong>and</strong> other businesses.<br />

Hence, the media have made an arrangement where editorial considerations, <strong>and</strong> not other<br />

purposes, will guide journalism. If the owner, the board or others should be concerned with<br />

the content, the culprit is the editor, solely. Denmark has adopted a similar declaration. 87 In<br />

Sweden, this arrangement is included in the constitution. 88 Further, several aspects of<br />

integrity are emphasised in the codes of conduct to ensure ethical adherence for press<br />

freedom in practice. 89 The maintaining of integrity will also include elements such as<br />

journalism without licensing, free entrance into the profession, <strong>and</strong> increased education.<br />

Despite these arrangements to ensure independence <strong>and</strong> intregrity, criticism about<br />

how commercial forces influence media content is still relevant. The commercialisation<br />

has found its ways into Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media, as in other countries, even if the owner <strong>and</strong><br />

board respect the principle that they should not interfere with editorial matters.<br />

From the angle of the authorities, the question is how these behave when conflicts<br />

with journalists arise. Compared to other countries, very few cases of harassment are<br />

reported from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media. 90 However, a typical conflict between authorities <strong>and</strong><br />

the press can be search for journalists’ sources. A particular purpose in such conflicts may<br />

86 The Association of Norwegian Editors, “Redaktørplakaten”. The English version is provided by<br />

correspondance with Øy, e-mail received 10 th February, 2005.<br />

87 Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 83.<br />

88 Correspondance with Øy, e-mail received 10 th February, 2005.<br />

89 The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom, articles 2.1-2.9.<br />

90 <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, pp. 194, 217 <strong>and</strong> 238.<br />

77


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

be the police’s need to know sources for solving a crime case. In Norway, the law gives<br />

courts authority to claim knowledge about sources. However, the code of conduct does not<br />

allow journalists to reveal any confidential source. In these cases journalists usually refuse<br />

to give any information despite penalties. 91 Another issue is how editorial departments are<br />

protected against a police search, similar to offices of lawyers <strong>and</strong> doctors. If the police<br />

need a search they have to follow an arrangement together with the editor <strong>and</strong> then bring<br />

the items to court. 92<br />

Private actors have the possibility to harass media through use of courts or other<br />

means. Civil proceedings against media are of course common in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia but these are<br />

not considered serious problems. 93 Possibilities of compensations in civil libel cases are<br />

relatively limited in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian laws. 94<br />

The case study in this section digs deep into a matter where a private individual<br />

tried to interfere with a newspaper’s coverage. Tensions among two gangs in Oslo resulted<br />

in January 2001 in assassination of one person followed by great attention in the media.<br />

Verdens Gang, the largest newspaper in Norway, published name <strong>and</strong> picture of the<br />

suspected culprit. His brother then showed up at the newspaper office <strong>and</strong> dem<strong>and</strong>ed an<br />

end to the coverage of his brother. A conversation with one of the journalists <strong>and</strong> a deputy<br />

editor included threats, understood as serious threats of murder. Knowledge about the<br />

gang’s capacity <strong>and</strong> weapons supported such an impression.<br />

These serious threats ended up in court which decided that the purpose of the<br />

threats was to stop the press’ negative reporting about his brother. Further, it stated: “In a<br />

democratic society it is of fundamental importance to ensure a free <strong>and</strong> independent press –<br />

not only towards the authorities, but towards individuals who are subject to close <strong>and</strong><br />

91 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 314-344.<br />

92 The Norwegian Government, “Straffeprosessloven”, Article 197, 198 <strong>and</strong> 200. This law is available in<br />

Norwegian on: http://www.lovdata.no/all/nl-19810522-025.html, downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />

93 <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, pp. 194, 217 <strong>and</strong> 238.<br />

94 Eggen, Ytringsfrihet, pp. 770-771.<br />

78


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

critical reporting too.” The conclusion was that the harshness of sentence in such a context<br />

should be distinctly higher than that in an ordinary case of threats. It was the prosecuting<br />

authority who brought the case to court. 95<br />

The case illustrates how journalistic activities in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia enjoy extraordinary<br />

protection. This is similar to, for instance, protection of public officials or police on duty<br />

because of the media’s important function in society. This case shows the level that press<br />

freedom has reached in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> explains why these countries rank at the top of<br />

press freedom in the world. 96<br />

95 Den norske Advokatforening, Norsk Retstidende : 2002 (Oslo: Den norske Advokatforening, 2002), p. 1206.<br />

96 Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, p. 88.<br />

79


Chapter 4: <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in East Africa<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

The press in colonial East Africa had to serve the purposes of the colonial rulers. Therefore<br />

the press brought the information they needed, <strong>and</strong> was turned into propag<strong>and</strong>a to promote<br />

their interests. The new African elite who succeeded as rulers after independence contin-<br />

ued to use mass media to consolidate their positions. However, democratisation in East<br />

Africa have resulted in increased press freedom.<br />

The notion of press freedom in East Africa is to a large extent fashioned on<br />

Western concepts <strong>and</strong> can be examined in two main parts. First, is the East African context<br />

on how press freedom developed, forces influencing the growth of press freedom, <strong>and</strong> the<br />

of position mass media in societies. Second, are the four aspects of press freedom that<br />

include media’s role, freedom to gather information, freedom to publish, <strong>and</strong> protection of<br />

journalistic activities.<br />

The East African Context<br />

The East African countries Kenya, Ug<strong>and</strong>a <strong>and</strong> Tanzania have a similar history as<br />

colonies. Despite differences after independence, there are many similarities in democratic,<br />

legal <strong>and</strong> cultural traditions as well as notions of press freedom <strong>and</strong> mass media’s position<br />

in these countries. Kenya is to some degree representative of these East African countries.<br />

Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

The missionaries started, <strong>and</strong> then white settlers <strong>and</strong> the colonial administration introduced<br />

printed press to Africa. 1 Patterns <strong>and</strong> trends of media <strong>and</strong> press freedom history in East<br />

Africa are similar. 2 The first printed periodical in East Africa was probably Taveta<br />

1 Abuoga, John Baptist <strong>and</strong> Mutere, Absalom Aggrey, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya (Nairobi: The<br />

African Council on Communication Education, 1988), pp. 4-5 <strong>and</strong> 109.<br />

2 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 57.<br />

80


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Chronicle, published quarterly by missionaires from 1895. During a few years, several<br />

newsletters, journals <strong>and</strong> even the newspaper The African St<strong>and</strong>ard, in 1902, were laun-<br />

ched. Activities by European settlers <strong>and</strong> missionaires initiated most of these publications<br />

which used European as well as Indian, Arabic, Swahili <strong>and</strong> Kikuyu languages. The first<br />

indigenous papers, made by Africans for their own purposes, did not appear before the<br />

1920s. The first was the Swahili Tangazo. A few years later was Muigwithania founded by<br />

the Kikuyu Central Association with Jomo Kenyatta as its first editor. 3<br />

The British ruled Kenya from around 1890 <strong>and</strong> declared it a colony in 1920. 4<br />

Ug<strong>and</strong>a fell under British control from 1900. 5 Tanganyika was transferred from Germany<br />

to Britain after First World War. 6 In early days of colonial rule relations between<br />

authorities <strong>and</strong> the press were harmonious. As controversies between authorities <strong>and</strong><br />

indigenous people rose, such conflicts became issues in the press. Colonial authorities<br />

started to turn to the press to further their interests. An attempt in Kenya was to publish<br />

Habari by the Native Affairs Department. The aim was to give literate Africans a moderate<br />

paper supporting official policies to avoid growth of papers that rejected the government,<br />

Europeans <strong>and</strong> Christianity. 7 Another step in this initially moderate policy was when the<br />

British in 1927 introduced the first radio in black Africa in Kenya. 8<br />

The British press freedom <strong>and</strong> information policy in colonial East Africa came to<br />

be a dual history. On one h<strong>and</strong>, the British were influenced by philosophy which gave rise<br />

to such ideas as liberty, democracy, public participation <strong>and</strong> hence need for free informa-<br />

tion. On the other h<strong>and</strong>, to achieve control in East Africa became more important than<br />

3<br />

Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 4-10.<br />

4<br />

Sayer, Geoff, Kenya : the background : the issues : the people : An Oxfam Country Profile (Oxford: Oxfam,<br />

2004 [1998]), pp. 16-17; <strong>and</strong> Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, p. 11.<br />

5<br />

Leggett, Ug<strong>and</strong>a, pp. 16-17.<br />

6<br />

Philip’s, Philip’s Encyclopedia, p. 724.<br />

7<br />

Ibid., pp. 8 <strong>and</strong> 13-17.<br />

8<br />

Nwosu, Ikechukwu, “An Overview of the Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society” in Domatob, Jerry, Jika,<br />

Abubakar <strong>and</strong> Nwosu, Ikechukwu (eds.), Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society (Nairobi: The African<br />

Council on Communication Education, 1987), p. 6.<br />

81


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

introducing democratic ideals. The press became a useful tool to introduce <strong>and</strong> support the<br />

colonial policies. The emerging hostile indigenous press had to be bridled <strong>and</strong> suppressed,<br />

<strong>and</strong> the British made colonial legislation to do so. 9<br />

Kenya’s colonial government’s State of Emergency from 1952 to 1960 is important<br />

for the history of press freedom in East Africa. The struggle between Kenyans <strong>and</strong> colonial<br />

masters increased from the 1920s to its peak during the Mau Mau war in the 1950s. During<br />

the State of Emergency, 1.5 million Kenyans were detained in camps or in villages of<br />

similar purpose. The press was treated as in war, including a propag<strong>and</strong>a war, targeting<br />

Kenyan, British <strong>and</strong> other foreign media. Yet, articles such as “Gestapo way in Kenya” <strong>and</strong><br />

other similar ones emerged in Engl<strong>and</strong>. Despite this, the colonial government did<br />

everything to silence sources, prohibit any contact between its staff <strong>and</strong> soldiers with<br />

journalists, denying facts <strong>and</strong> cover information which was not in favour of the British in<br />

Kenya. The means there were regulations as well as prosecuting, scaring <strong>and</strong> defaming<br />

sources to control the press. 10<br />

As a reaction to how mainstream media reflected the colonial rulers, a number of<br />

underground newspapers come into existence in Kenya. Out of this grew an alternative<br />

press as opposition to the mainstream press. 11 Despite nicknames as gutter press or similar,<br />

these newspapers have been included in the mainstream political process. 12<br />

Around 1960, most African colonies got their independence. The East African<br />

countries gained freedom between 1961-63. The transforming to African rule ensured an<br />

almost status quo in structures of power <strong>and</strong> economics. A new African elite emerged with<br />

similar interests to European colonial masters <strong>and</strong> settlers. Africans got the political<br />

9 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 49-52.<br />

10 Elkins, Caroline, Britain’s Gulag : The Brutal End of Empire in Kenya (London: Jonathan Cape, 2005), pp.<br />

46-47, 54-55, 84, 274, 284-292, 307 <strong>and</strong> 344-349; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 66-67.<br />

11 Karanja, Mugambi, “Growth of print media in Kenya” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media<br />

culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung,<br />

2000), pp. 27-28, 31 <strong>and</strong> 33.<br />

12 Ogundimu, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa”, p. 219.<br />

82


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

authority, but Europeans continued to own a lot of l<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> business. The socio-economic<br />

hierarchy was not challenged much. The printed press became a part of this pattern <strong>and</strong> an<br />

arena for the ruling elite’s issues, values, matters <strong>and</strong> interests. 13 At that time the press was<br />

supposed to promote development <strong>and</strong> nation building, in reality a manipulation where the<br />

press had to serve the elite <strong>and</strong> not democratisation. 14<br />

Media laws from the colonial era survived independence in Kenya, 15 Ug<strong>and</strong>a 16 <strong>and</strong><br />

Tanzania. 17 Colonial administration’s media laws to control <strong>and</strong> manipulate the colonies<br />

became useful instruments of the new ruling elite. 18 For instance, laws on ‘false news<br />

offence’ were introduced <strong>and</strong> are still valid in East Africa even though Engl<strong>and</strong> abolished<br />

them in 1887. 19<br />

Independent East Africa has many examples of harassing of editors <strong>and</strong> journalists<br />

with or without lawsuits as well as banning of publications. 20 Another way was to national-<br />

ise media, such as the Tanzanian President Julius K. Nyerere did in accordance with his<br />

policy of Africanisation. 21 In Kenya, the colonial administration had established TV as a<br />

private company just before independence. President Jomo Kenyatta became suspicious of<br />

13<br />

Ibid., pp. 70-72; <strong>and</strong> Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 26-27, 77-81 <strong>and</strong> 98-100.<br />

14<br />

Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, pp. 1-5.<br />

15<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 58-60 <strong>and</strong> 67.<br />

16<br />

Kemigisha, Rose Mary (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong><br />

<strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Foundation, 1998), p. 1.<br />

17<br />

Kilimwiko, Lawrence <strong>and</strong> Mapunda, Joseph (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania (Dar<br />

es Salaam/Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong>, Friedrich Ebert Foundation; <strong>and</strong> Association of<br />

Journalists <strong>and</strong> Media Workers, 1998), p. 2.<br />

18<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 63.<br />

19<br />

The East African, “Media <strong>and</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: Ug<strong>and</strong>a Supreme Court Kicks Out Colonial Law” in The East<br />

African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), 1 st March, 2004, pp. 8 <strong>and</strong> 10.<br />

20<br />

Ibid., pp. 72-79, Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, pp. v <strong>and</strong> 7-10, Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong><br />

Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 3 <strong>and</strong> 6.<br />

21<br />

Nyerere, Julius K., ”The Arusha Declaration: Socialism <strong>and</strong> Self-Reliance” in <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> Socialism : A<br />

Selection From Writings <strong>and</strong> Speeches 1965-1967 (Dar es Salaam/London: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>,<br />

1968), pp. 231-234, Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania,<br />

pp. vii-viii; <strong>and</strong> Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, p. 34.<br />

83


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

the motives. So, despite Kenya’s privatisation policy, the broadcasting company became<br />

nationalised <strong>and</strong> subordinate to the Information Ministry. 22<br />

Nairobi has grown up to be a center of journalist education in Africa. IPI, one of the<br />

NGOs concerned with global spread of press freedom, considered around 1960 that it was<br />

crucial to educate African journalists <strong>and</strong> editors to be able to take over <strong>and</strong> run a democra-<br />

tic press. At independence, media were mostly run by Europeans. During the 1960s, 318<br />

journalists from 18 countries participated in half year courses in Nairobi or Lagos under<br />

the auspices of the IPI. 23 These journalism courses at Nairobi College were a predecessor<br />

for the establishment of Kenya’s first permanent journalism education, at the Nairobi<br />

Univeristy in the 1970s. 24 In Ug<strong>and</strong>a <strong>and</strong> Tanzania limitations of adequate journalistic<br />

education institutions is pointed out as a hindrance to development of mass media. 25<br />

The rich variety of media associations in East Africa indicates that ‘interests of the<br />

press’ are not one coherent subject or are not yet carved out. 26 These are as wide-spread as<br />

labor unions, owner associations, The Association of Media Women in Kenya as well as<br />

community based fellowships. Despite the spread of interests, such organisations together<br />

play a role within the civil society where these are agents for media’s interests including<br />

press freedom. 27 Moreover, such organisations often participate in international unions<br />

with fellows from other countries, or as members of international NGOs. In this way these<br />

associations make up strings from East Africa to a global network concerned with mass<br />

media issues. These organisations can act as powerful lobbyists <strong>and</strong> are important players<br />

from an international relations perspective. The presence of a significant branch of<br />

22<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 82-93.<br />

23<br />

Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, pp. 109-169; <strong>and</strong> <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI – The First Ten Years,<br />

pp. 80-87.<br />

24<br />

Bourgault, Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa, p. 128.<br />

25<br />

Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, p. 3; <strong>and</strong> Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book<br />

on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. viii, xi <strong>and</strong> 50-60.<br />

26<br />

Kadhi, Joe S. M., “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?” in Kunczik, Michael (ed.), Ethics in<br />

Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-Stiftung, 1999), p. 110.<br />

27<br />

Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 85-89; <strong>and</strong> Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A<br />

h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 61-73.<br />

84


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

UNESCO in Nairobi, concerned with press freedom, does strengthen the global connect-<br />

ions to East Africa in these matters.<br />

Kenya has enjoyed a higher level of press freedom compared to other developing<br />

countries. 28 One reason may be the education of journalists in the country. 29 The level <strong>and</strong><br />

variety of journalism education in Kenya is among the highest in Africa. 30 Nairobi has<br />

emerged as the media centre in East <strong>and</strong> Central Africa. 31 In independent Kenya, press<br />

freedom has had its ups <strong>and</strong> downs. Due to weak legal protection, press freedom in Kenya<br />

has been dependent on politicians’ interpretation <strong>and</strong> goodwill. 32 While press freedom has<br />

been improved 33 there are occasions when journalists <strong>and</strong> editors are questionned <strong>and</strong><br />

imprisoned. 34<br />

A chronological survey of some changes in Kenyan press freedom shows that the<br />

colonial rulers just before independence still maintained a strong regime towards the press.<br />

Even new restrictions were still introduced. 35 Emergence of the Nation newspapers in 1960<br />

marked a milestone. Despite foreign ownership, these newspapers were staffed with<br />

Africans <strong>and</strong> added Kenyan opinions within mainstream media. 36<br />

Optimism on press freedom was quickly reduced after independence when new<br />

rulers started to manipulate media <strong>and</strong> news for their propag<strong>and</strong>a purposes. 37 Criticism of<br />

government <strong>and</strong> the president resulted in silencing of editors. 38 Even worse became the<br />

28 Ogundimu, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa”, p. 215.<br />

29 Coppard, Kit, IPI: The Defence of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> : Part II:<br />

1976-1988 (London/Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1988), p. 43.<br />

30 Merrill, Global Journalism, p. 253.<br />

31<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 91.<br />

32<br />

Abuoga <strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 79-80.<br />

33<br />

Bindra, Sunny, “The real achievement of 2003 is an open society” in Sunday Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />

Media Group), commentary, 21 st December, 2003.<br />

34<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, p. 27-28.<br />

35<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 70.<br />

36<br />

Ibid., pp. 71-72; <strong>and</strong> Odero, Mitch, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther<br />

(eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich<br />

Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 11-13.<br />

37<br />

Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, p. 122.<br />

38 Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, p. 15.<br />

85


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

suppressing of critical voices within the press after the assassination of the Planning <strong>and</strong><br />

Economic Affairs Minister Tom Mboya in 1969. President Kenyatta used the political<br />

crises to force on performance of media that ensured the victory in the election the same<br />

year. 39 Banning of media became common. Newspapers <strong>and</strong> magazines had to support<br />

government to survive. During the presidencies of both Kenyatta <strong>and</strong> Daniel arap Moi<br />

there were periods where the press had no space to perform any democratic role. 40 Yet, the<br />

1970s <strong>and</strong> up to 1982, the end of Kenyatta’s <strong>and</strong> beginning of Moi’s eras, was a period<br />

where the press had some breathing space. Several newspapers were established, but poor<br />

markets made it difficult to keep on. 41<br />

The attempt of coup d’état in 1982 marked a change in press freedom. President<br />

Moi emphasised his ‘nyayo’ philosophy. That means that anyone, media included, had to<br />

subordinate themselves to the Head of State who acted as the nation’s father figure. Kenya<br />

entered an era of dictatorship. 42 The underground alternative press recurred as the<br />

opposition’s channel of information. Further, some critical magazines set st<strong>and</strong>ards of<br />

courage in this hostile era where media often were banned. Nairobi Law Monthly, Finance,<br />

Financial Review, Society, Beyond <strong>and</strong> Development Agenda were capable to express<br />

opinions towards the dictatorship, <strong>and</strong> became pioneers for renewed democratisation<br />

including an independent press. 43 Due to human rights offences, Kenya was under<br />

international pressure. Foreign correspondents in Nairobi were carefully watched. 44<br />

Foreign funding of critical magazines indicated how international actors were concerned<br />

39 Kamau, John, “How Kenyatte gagged the press to manage the Mboya crisis” in Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi:<br />

The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 25 th April, 2004.<br />

40 Kamau, John, “When You Had to Shut up or Languish in Prison for Years” in Media Review, a pull-out in<br />

eXpression today (Nairobi: The Media <strong>Institute</strong>), May 1999, p. 38-41.<br />

41 Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, pp. 15-17; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 74-75.<br />

42<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 58 <strong>and</strong> 118; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 75.<br />

43<br />

Karanja, “Growth of print media in Kenya”, pp. 38-39; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 75-<br />

79 <strong>and</strong> 302-303.<br />

44<br />

Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, pp. 19-22.<br />

86


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

with press freedom in Kenya. 45 From 1990 restoration of freedom of expression became a<br />

condition for the United States’ aid to Kenya. 46<br />

In 1991 multi party system was introduced <strong>and</strong> a corresponding growth of plurality<br />

in media followed. 47 The alternative press mushroomed, which also proved Kenya as an<br />

ethnically fractured society. In this way the alternative press became means of partisanism<br />

<strong>and</strong> ethnic journalism. 48 Critical journalism started to recur in mainstream media. 49 One<br />

issue that illustrated the press’ new role was how the state was no longer the only actor in<br />

making laws. Civil society participated in a public debate in media <strong>and</strong> started to influence<br />

law making. 50<br />

However, three examples illustrate that these still operated under difficult<br />

circumstances. First, in 1993 the police dismantled vital parts of Fotoform Ltd.’s printing<br />

machine <strong>and</strong> seized what they considered as seditious publications. Fotoform printed<br />

Society, Economic Review, Finance <strong>and</strong> Nairobi Law Monthly. The latter was banned at<br />

that time. Several people were arrested in related cases. 51 Second, a new Defamation Act<br />

was passed in 1992 that was seemingly designed to protect politicians. In the wake of the<br />

murder of Foreign Minister Robert Ouko in 1990, several media reports ended up in court.<br />

Nairobi lawyer George Oraro was in 1993 awarded about US$ 19,000, fifteen times more<br />

than in any other libel case. In 1999 Justice Evans Gichuru of Court of Appeal was<br />

awarded US$ 28,000 <strong>and</strong> Minister Nicholas Biwott was awarded US$ 390,000. The<br />

45<br />

Munene, Macharia, “Africans <strong>and</strong> Intellectual Adventurism: East African Intellectual Warriors”, paper<br />

presented in the University of Illinois NEH Seminar, African Studies in Africa, 11 th – 15 th November,<br />

2002, p. 8.<br />

46<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 79.<br />

47<br />

Karanja, “Growth of print media in Kenya”, p. 39<br />

48<br />

Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, p. 103; <strong>and</strong> Omw<strong>and</strong>a, Lewis Odhiambo, “The<br />

mass media <strong>and</strong> democracy: Underst<strong>and</strong>ing the problem of objectivity in multicultural settings” in Odero,<br />

Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />

Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 203 <strong>and</strong> 219.<br />

49<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, p. 189.<br />

50<br />

Mute, Lawrence Murugu, “Media policy in Kenya” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media<br />

culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung,<br />

2000), p. 148.<br />

51<br />

Ibid., p. 145; <strong>and</strong> Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 301-304.<br />

87


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

practice of these huge compensations made media careful <strong>and</strong> enforced self-censorship. 52<br />

Third, in 1997 President Moi wanted to avoid extensive attention to ethnic clashes. He<br />

used the Public Security Act <strong>and</strong> curfew to deny journalists entrance into actual areas of<br />

conflict <strong>and</strong> reduced media’s ability to cover those events. 53<br />

However, the level of press freedom increased through the 1990s. A milestone was<br />

liberalisation of the airwaves even if the first private actors entered broadcasting as result<br />

of political fraternity or struggles in court. 54 An attempt to reduce laws about media has not<br />

been successful. Still, there are about 14 Acts which have implications for media. 55 The<br />

greatest threat to press freedom in Kenya at present under Presiden Mwai Kibaki is<br />

probably self-censorship due to strong laws on defamation <strong>and</strong> sedition as well as<br />

contempt of court <strong>and</strong> freedom of speech. 56 Despite self-censorship, media’s activities in<br />

Kenya have shown that a free <strong>and</strong> vibrant press can be useful in effecting transparency,<br />

democracy <strong>and</strong> good governance. 57 The alternative press has still an ethnic feature. Yet,<br />

several of the most controversial cases latter years have come up through the alternative<br />

press <strong>and</strong> then been picked up by the mainstream media. 58 The Kenyan press seems to<br />

perform its role without direct intereference from government 59 although the broadcast<br />

media are still subjected to attempts of control 60 <strong>and</strong> although President Kibaki’s position<br />

52<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 181-183 <strong>and</strong> 192-201.<br />

53<br />

Okello, Rosemary, “Media law past, present <strong>and</strong> future” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media<br />

culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung,<br />

2000), p. 160.<br />

54<br />

Carver, Coliver, Lauriciano, Lush <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Who Rules the Airwaves, pp. 33-39.<br />

55<br />

Okello, “Media law past, present <strong>and</strong> future”, p. 158.<br />

56<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 181-190, 256, 272-277, 312-313 <strong>and</strong> 326. One example: Ogutu,<br />

Judy, “Mwau seeks orders to bar ‘The St<strong>and</strong>ard’ ” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news<br />

article, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />

57<br />

Munene, G. Macharia, “Historical Perspectives on Politics <strong>and</strong> Journalism” in Okigbo, Charles (ed.), Reporting<br />

Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council for Communication Education, 1994), p. 50.<br />

58 st<br />

Oral interview with Kodi Barth, Lecturer of Journalism at USIU, Nairobi, in his office at USIU, 1<br />

September, 2004. E-mail: kbarth@usiu.ac.ke.<br />

59<br />

Kadhi, Joe, in his address at The Media Council of Kenya’s public conferense on “Is There a Place for<br />

Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” at The Stanley Hotel, Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005. Kadhi is member of The<br />

Media Council of Kenya; <strong>and</strong> Head of Extended Studies <strong>and</strong> Journalist in Residence at USIU, Nairobi.<br />

60<br />

Daily Nation, “Tuju’s order to censor broadcasts ‘is illegal’ ” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />

Group), news article, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />

88


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

is that Kenyans shall enjoy unlimited press freedom because it entrenches development<br />

structures. 61 The government has stated that it supports a system of self-regulation. 62<br />

Ug<strong>and</strong>a encourages private actors in the media <strong>and</strong> the print media operate like<br />

other businesses. Nevertheless, in Ug<strong>and</strong>a the government is frequently hostile to media. 63<br />

Common methods of control are questioning, charging, imprisoning as well as demonising<br />

or sc<strong>and</strong>alising journalists. For instance, the Ug<strong>and</strong>an journalist <strong>and</strong> editor Charles<br />

Onyango-Obbo was, between 1997 <strong>and</strong> 2003, arrested three times <strong>and</strong> brought before court<br />

120 times. Ug<strong>and</strong>an journalists, however, have not been targets of assassinations as was<br />

the case during the regimes of Obote <strong>and</strong> Amin. 64<br />

Broadcast media have to pay fees. For non-commercial actors these fees are a<br />

heavy burden. A radio station in Kampala has to pay US$ 1,500 annually. Many<br />

broadcasters are struggling to avoid bankruptcy. 65 The Penal Code still bans publishing on<br />

a wide range of information. 66 Unexpectedly, in 2004 Ug<strong>and</strong>a’s Supreme Court ruled that<br />

Ug<strong>and</strong>a’s laws, from the colonial era, on ‘false news offence’ were unconstitutional. 67<br />

Tanzanian press freedom is far behind Kenya <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a. There is freedom of<br />

expression in the Constitution, but about 40 laws make up a web of hindrances against free<br />

press. After pressure, the government started a process to review media laws <strong>and</strong> prepare<br />

61<br />

The Kenyan Government, “Why Mwai Kibaki does not speak out on everything” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), advertisement, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />

62<br />

Daily Nation, “Government set to review press laws, says Kiraitu” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />

Group), news article, 5th April, 2004.<br />

63<br />

Wakabi, Wairagala, “Kenya <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a Still Have Though <strong>Press</strong> Laws” in The East African (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), news article, 19th April, 2004.<br />

64<br />

Oral interview with Charles Onyango-Obbo, Managing Editor of Convergence <strong>and</strong> Syndication, Nation<br />

Media Group Ltd. in Kenya, e-mail: cobbo@nation.co.ke. Former editor of the newspaper The Monitor in<br />

Ug<strong>and</strong>a. Interview with him in his office in Nairobi 21 st February, 2005, about press freedom in Ug<strong>and</strong>a.<br />

65<br />

Nakkazi, Esther, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations” in The East African (Nairobi: Nation<br />

Media Group), news article, 12th January, 2004.<br />

66<br />

Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, pp. 7-8.<br />

67 th<br />

Supreme Court of Ug<strong>and</strong>a, judgement dated 11 February, 2004, on an appeal in Monitor v. Constitutional<br />

Court, judgement published 21 st July, 2000. The judgement is published in full by The East African<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), 1 st March, 2004, pp. 8-10 <strong>and</strong> 16-17.<br />

89


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

for open information policy. The review is expected to conclude in 2006. 68 The most<br />

important laws are The Penal Code (on sedition), The National Security Act, The<br />

Newspapers Act, The Broadcasting Service Act, Prisons Act 69 <strong>and</strong> a new Terrorism Act. 70<br />

Tanzania was a socialistic one-party state under President Julius K. Nyerere. In 1992 a<br />

liberalisation process including the media started <strong>and</strong> media’s role in development was<br />

emphasised. An experience from the time before 1992 was how political dependency<br />

reduced trust in media resulting in declined circulation. 71 Still, after liberalisation, the<br />

media experienced harassment, searching, questioning, imprisonment <strong>and</strong> even stripping of<br />

citizenship. At the same time, journalists friendly to government received favours such as<br />

transport <strong>and</strong> access to information. 72<br />

Tanzania is, except South Africa, the African country south of Sahara with the<br />

largest diversified media industry. 73 Regarding quality, Tanzanian media do not have such<br />

a prominent position in Africa. It is noteworthy that Tanzania in 2004 waived some taxes<br />

on the media industry. In addition, The Media Council established in 1999 contributed<br />

significantly to conflict mediation. The number of media cases in courts declined<br />

considerably. 74<br />

Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

Three forces have surrounded the growth of press freedom in East Africa. First, is<br />

ownership in general as well as global media <strong>and</strong> foreign owners’ impact on press<br />

68<br />

Oral interview with Theophil Makunga, Consulting Editor of Taifa Leo, Nation Media Group Ltd. in<br />

Kenya, e-mail: tmakunga@nation.co.ke. Former Editor-in-Chief of Majira <strong>and</strong> Managing Editor of<br />

Mwananchi, both Tanzanian newspapers. Interview with him at Nation Centre in Nairobi 1 st March, 2005,<br />

about press freedom in Tanzania.<br />

69<br />

Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 1-9.<br />

70<br />

Oral interview with Makunga.<br />

71<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, p. 123.<br />

72<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, pp. 48; <strong>and</strong> oral interview with Makunga.<br />

73<br />

Kivikuru, Ullamaija, “From State Socialism to Deregulation” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi<br />

(eds.), The Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage Publications, 1998), pp. 140-141; <strong>and</strong><br />

Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. vii.<br />

74<br />

Oral interview with Makunga.<br />

90


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

freedom. Second, African elite classes hamper press freedom. Third, is the press freedom’s<br />

role in national development.<br />

First, despite the mushrooming of media in Kenya, there is concentration on the<br />

owners’ side. These owners are involved with the political <strong>and</strong> business elites. Politics<br />

have been determinant in allocating of broadcasting licenses. There are no legal regulation<br />

of how extensive ownership single actors can buy in media. Five units control mainstream<br />

media in Kenya. These are Nation Media Group, St<strong>and</strong>ard Group, Royal Media, The<br />

People Daily <strong>and</strong> Kenya Times. The last two started late <strong>and</strong> remained marginalised. Due<br />

to this situation, press freedom in Kenya operates within a framework made up by a few. In<br />

addition, the state owned Kenya Broadcasting Service (KBC) has a national TV <strong>and</strong><br />

several radio channels. 75<br />

Nation Media Group is known for its newspapers, radio <strong>and</strong> TV which all are<br />

named ‘Nation’. In addition, the group has engagements in several newspapers, magazines<br />

<strong>and</strong> broadcasting stations in all of the East African countries. The Aga Khan, leader of the<br />

Ismaili Muslim sect, is the founder <strong>and</strong> major owner with 45% of the shares. 76 The Aga<br />

Khan has a lot of business in Kenya. These are media, schools, hospitals <strong>and</strong> hotels.<br />

Nation’s media are considered as business friendly. The Aga Khan is known to influence<br />

politics in Kenya by media <strong>and</strong> networking, to ensure good conditions for his business. 77<br />

Indirect support is achieved by how his media advocate a multicultural nation governed on<br />

opportunities for all. 78 Nation’s media supported the new NARC government <strong>and</strong> President<br />

Kibaki during last election in 2002. 79<br />

75 Oral interview with Barth.<br />

76 Nation Media Group Limited, Annual Report & Accounts / Ripoti Na Hesabu 2003 (Nairobi: Nation<br />

Media Group, 2004), pp. 10-11 <strong>and</strong> 42.<br />

77 Oral interview with W. Kwendo Opanga, Executive Editor of The St<strong>and</strong>ard/Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard, in his office<br />

in St<strong>and</strong>ard, 10 th April, 2005. E-mail: opashw@east<strong>and</strong>ard.net.<br />

78 Karanja, “Growth of print media in Kenya”, p. 35.<br />

79 Oral interview with Barth.<br />

91


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

The St<strong>and</strong>ard Group’s most prominent media are the newspapers The St<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>and</strong><br />

Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard <strong>and</strong> the TV station KTN. 80 The St<strong>and</strong>ard had for the most part good<br />

relations with the presidents Kenyatta <strong>and</strong> Moi. The given reason was that St<strong>and</strong>ard’s<br />

business benefitted from these relations. 81 Powerful individuals during Moi’s <strong>and</strong> KANU’s<br />

regime were major shareholders before the election in 2002, <strong>and</strong> used their power to<br />

influence St<strong>and</strong>ard’s media. Now, these shares are sold to foreign companies probably<br />

controlled by the same individuals. However, after the loss in the 2002 election <strong>and</strong><br />

transforming to ‘invisible foreign owners’, they have not interfered with journalism in<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard’s media. Their declared objective is that St<strong>and</strong>ard shall make a good profit.<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard’s media are also considered as business friendly. Kibaki’s government consider<br />

The St<strong>and</strong>ard as an enemy due the the newspaper’s mainly adversarial position. 82<br />

Royal Media is owned by Samuel K. Macharia. Citizen FM <strong>and</strong> Citizen TV are the<br />

most known media of this group which has several other radio stations as well. It is<br />

estimated that Royal Media’s potential listenership is 70% of all Kenyans. 83 In 1990 the<br />

first private actors entered broadcasting in Kenya. Macharia considered it as a business<br />

opportunity, <strong>and</strong> applied for licence which was rejected. 84 After a battle in court, President<br />

Moi in 1997 promised broadcast license in exhange for political support. The honeymoon<br />

with Moi became short. For a year, Macharia’s radio <strong>and</strong> TV stations were banned. In the<br />

2002 election, Citizen’s radio <strong>and</strong> TV were major supporters for President Kibaki. During<br />

the two last years, Macharia has got licences <strong>and</strong> been able to launch five new FM stations.<br />

He is regarded as close to Kibaki’s government. 85<br />

80<br />

Ibid.<br />

81<br />

Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, p. 19.<br />

82<br />

Oral interview with Opanga.<br />

83<br />

Wachira, Nick, “The unlikely media mogul : Will Citizen rule the airwaves?” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi:<br />

The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 22 nd March, 2005.<br />

84<br />

Makali, David, “Progress <strong>and</strong> Problems in Freeing Kenya’s Airwaves” in Media Review, a pull-out in<br />

eXpression today (Nairobi: The Media <strong>Institute</strong>), May 1999, p. 13-14 <strong>and</strong> 18.<br />

85<br />

Wachira, “The unlikely media mogul : Will Citizen rule the airwaves?”<br />

92


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Foreign owners have had major shares in East African media. Further, East African<br />

media have to operate within the regime of global media. Both factors limit their freedom.<br />

Put to an extreme, Tom Mboya stated that Kenya achieved independence despite the world<br />

press. 86 East African mass media do not work in a vacuum. Their content depends on<br />

foreign sources <strong>and</strong> news agencies. 87 Advertisement income depends on foreign global<br />

business <strong>and</strong> its preferences. 88 Media ideology is a result of Western capitalistic concepts. 89<br />

Hence, East African media are wrapped up in a web made by global media. One view is<br />

that this is how global forces secure universal spread of press freedom. A competing view<br />

is that East African media are slaves of a global media regime <strong>and</strong> have lost freedom to<br />

play their own unique role. According to the latter, one allegation is that such a Western<br />

ideological press would never liberate the third world. 90<br />

Foreign owned media were initially nationalised in Tanzania <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a. Kenya<br />

allowed the presence of foreign owners <strong>and</strong> precipitated recurring debates about their role<br />

<strong>and</strong> purposes. One claim is that foreigners were the only ones strong enough to resist<br />

pressure from Kenyan authorities. Foreign ownership was thus a security for press<br />

freedom. Another claim was that foreign owners through Kenyan media can interfere with<br />

domestic affairs. This made foreign ownership an agent for foreign interests. A third view<br />

was that owners were owners, <strong>and</strong> both locals <strong>and</strong> foreigners were pursuing their media<br />

business according to commercial interests. In that case, the question was not about foreign<br />

ownership, it was on how private media operate as agents for capitalistic interests. 91 If<br />

86<br />

Mboya, “Relations Between <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> Governments in Africa”, p 144.<br />

87<br />

Paterson, “Global Battlefields”, pp. 79-81.<br />

88<br />

Carrington <strong>and</strong> Nelson, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics”, pp. 226-232; <strong>and</strong> Abuoga<br />

<strong>and</strong> Mutere, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya, pp. 94-95.<br />

89<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 60-61; <strong>and</strong> Abubakar, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological<br />

Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa”, pp. 55-56.<br />

90<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, p. 49.<br />

91<br />

Mytton, Graham, Mass Communication in Africa (London: Edward Arnold Publishers, 1983), p. 19,<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 52, 55, 115 <strong>and</strong> 167, Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 71.<br />

93


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

profit is the sole purpose, such media owners would be vulnerable to corrupt practices as<br />

well as economic arrangements. 92<br />

Second, African elite tend to hamper press freedom <strong>and</strong> benefitted from the<br />

structures of the colonial system. Therefore, despite national liberation, these did not have<br />

the interest of press freedom at all. 93 The mass media were rather considered as vehicles<br />

for the rulers. 94 As a result, mass media were manipulated to be propag<strong>and</strong>a organs. 95 They<br />

justified control of media on grounds such as national unity, stability, development, culture<br />

<strong>and</strong> religion. The hidden selfish interest was to gain monopoly over state resources<br />

including information flow <strong>and</strong> media. So, the ruling elite manipulated public opinion. 96<br />

Democratisation processes have relied on this suppression of media, but many legal<br />

instruments such as defamation <strong>and</strong> false news are still valid <strong>and</strong> serve powerful<br />

individuals to control media. 97 One result is self-censorship to avoid conflicts. This<br />

weakness of press freedom is articulated by the senior Kenyan journalist <strong>and</strong> editor, Philip<br />

Ochieng, in this way: “…<strong>and</strong> freedom of the <strong>Press</strong> became widespread. But we proved<br />

totally unable to exploit it.” 98<br />

Third, there appeared to be contradictions between press freedom <strong>and</strong> national<br />

development. The core is a mix of press freedom with other purposes. Nyerere emphasised<br />

development including use of media. Nyerere wrote: “<strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> development are as<br />

completely linked together as chickens <strong>and</strong> eggs… without freedom you get no<br />

development.” 99 Further, he stated that in a country faced with poverty, press freedom<br />

92<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong> , pp. 167-170.<br />

93<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 57.<br />

94<br />

Mytton, Mass Communication in Africa, pp. 42-43.<br />

95<br />

Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, p. 122.<br />

96<br />

An-na’im, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right”, pp. 23-24.<br />

97<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 58-59 <strong>and</strong> 114-124.<br />

98<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, p. 192.<br />

99<br />

Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, p. 247.<br />

94


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

should be limited just as liberal democracies had done in wartime. 100 Besides these,<br />

Tanzanian media were bound by development as a national ideology. 101 Thoughts similar<br />

to Nyerere’s wrapped into such terms as ‘national unity’ became widespread in Africa. 102<br />

Put to an extreme it could be interpreted as building loyalty to the ‘national father’ as<br />

during President Daniel arap Moi’s regime in Kenya. 103 However, press freedom <strong>and</strong><br />

media have been inextricably connected with a development agenda in Africa. 104<br />

‘Development journalism’ seems initially to be in tune with ‘social responsibility’<br />

but this is not necessarily the case. First there are assumptions that the audience will<br />

behave in expected ways, that they would accept media’s messages, <strong>and</strong> that media’s<br />

content would empower people to develop. It does not always happen. 105 In addition, it is<br />

argued that development issues do not work as attractive content in a way dem<strong>and</strong>ed by<br />

commercialised news values. 106 Second, ‘development journalism’ is said to be just<br />

another idea of the authoritarian press system which was a Soviet practice. 107<br />

‘Development’ will determine the framework for ‘truth’. Such a philosophy can be used to<br />

justify lying <strong>and</strong> limit information flow to ‘pedagogically skilful’ content. So, media’s role<br />

can be controlled to stabilise the regime <strong>and</strong> journalists would not be allowed to critisise. 108<br />

The whole game of building national image by using national <strong>and</strong> international<br />

media is included in this objection. 109 Development journalism was used as a term to alter<br />

100<br />

Mytton, Mass Communication in Africa, p. 59.<br />

101<br />

Kivikuru, “From State Socialism to Deregulation”, p. 150.<br />

102<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 80.<br />

103<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 117-118.<br />

104<br />

Okolo, Dan Edogbo, “Agenda Setting Role of the Mass Media in Political Reporting” in Okigbo, Charles<br />

(ed.), Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council for Communication Education,<br />

1994), pp. 31 <strong>and</strong> 34.<br />

105<br />

Ochilo, “Africa : Perspectives for Editorial Independence”, p. 45.<br />

106<br />

Pol<strong>and</strong>, Kate, “Development Moments: Radio’s Public Face of Development” in Journal of <strong>International</strong><br />

Development (West Sussex, UK: John Wiley & Sons, 2004) volume 16, number 5, July 2004, p. 714.<br />

107<br />

Retief, Johan, Media Ethics : An Introduction to Responsible Journalism (Oxford: Oxford University<br />

<strong>Press</strong>, 2002), pp. 17 <strong>and</strong> 21.<br />

108<br />

Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, pp. 251-255.<br />

109<br />

Boyd-Barrett <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, “The Globalization of News”, p. 5; <strong>and</strong> Dunn, Kevin C, Imaging the Congo :<br />

the international relations of identity (New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2003), pp. 3 <strong>and</strong> 124.<br />

95


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

news values in developing countries to turn the press to benefit authorities. 110 Tanzania, as<br />

other African states, established a state owned news agency, SHIHATA, to control<br />

information flow out of the country, ensure Tanzania’s international image <strong>and</strong> support<br />

other political objectives. SHIHATA <strong>and</strong> similar agencies achieved low credibility <strong>and</strong><br />

became unprofitable business. Independent media did not want to pay for a service they<br />

considered to be propag<strong>and</strong>a. 111<br />

When press freedom interacts with other purposes, the performance is a balancing<br />

art. A Kenyan notion of this is summed up by Mitch Odero, Chairman of the Media<br />

Council of Kenya: “Journalism is a national duty. But it is not so much a national duty as<br />

America’s, the homel<strong>and</strong> of freedoms, journalists do in the coverage of Iraq.” 112 In this<br />

statement, he recognised a journalist’s national duty as well as limitations of such a duty.<br />

Mass Media in the Societies<br />

Radio is definitely the most wide-spread mass medium in East Africa. 113 It is because radio<br />

is cheap compared to newspapers <strong>and</strong> TV, <strong>and</strong> because transport <strong>and</strong> illiteracy are no<br />

hindrance for radio. The UNESCO measure of minimal spread of radio is 20 receivers per<br />

1000 inhabitants. Together with radio, TV is ranked as the second most used comm-<br />

unication channel in Africa. 114<br />

Number of radio- <strong>and</strong> TV-receivers pr. 1000 inhabitants (1996) 115<br />

Country TV Radio<br />

Kenya 26 108<br />

Tanzania 3.3 280<br />

Ug<strong>and</strong>a 16 130<br />

110 Ali, Owais Aslam, “Claiming that Differences in ‘Values’ Justify News Directions” in The World <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, New Code Words For Censorship : Modern Labels for Curbs on the <strong>Press</strong> (Reston,<br />

USA: The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, 2002), pp. 71-73.<br />

111 Kivikuru, “From State Socialism to Deregulation”, pp. 137-140.<br />

112 Odero, Mitch, in his closing address at The Media Council of Kenya’s public conferense on “Is There a<br />

Place for Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” at The Stanley Hotel, Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005.<br />

113 Carver, Coliver, Lauriciano, Lush <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Who Rules the Airwaves, p. 1.<br />

114 Ochilo, “Africa : Perspectives for Editorial Independence”, pp. 43-44.<br />

115 United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997, table 18, pp. 130-137.<br />

96


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Newspapers <strong>and</strong> other print media are regarded as a luxury. Spread of newspapers<br />

is far below UNESCO’s measure for minimum circulation, which is 100 per 1000<br />

inhabitants. 116 US$ 0.5 for a copy is expensive when efficient readership need a copy daily,<br />

<strong>and</strong> the majority do not have more than US$ 1 daily for survival. Poor infrastucture limits<br />

distribution of newspapers to urban areas. Content <strong>and</strong> advertising also indicate that<br />

newspapers are targeting the urban elites. 117<br />

Spread of daily newspapers (1996) 118<br />

Country Number of Total Circulation per<br />

titles circulation 1000 inhabitants<br />

Kenya 4 263,000 9.4<br />

Tanzania 2 40,000 2.1<br />

Ug<strong>and</strong>a 3 120,000 3.9<br />

The figures are old, 1996, but are used because these are the available ones in both East<br />

Africa <strong>and</strong> Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. Since 1996, the number of daily newspapers in Tanzania has<br />

grown to ten; six in Kiswahili <strong>and</strong> four in English. 119<br />

Books are even a more elite medium than newspapers.<br />

Number of new published book titles (1996) 120<br />

Country New book titles Titles per<br />

1000 inhabitants<br />

Kenya (1994) 300 0.011<br />

Tanzania 288 0.009<br />

Ug<strong>and</strong>a 172 0.008<br />

Internet is difficult to measure due to rapid changes. However, one indicator is<br />

Africa’s share of Internet host sites globally. That was 0.025% <strong>and</strong> continued to decline in<br />

1998. 121 The same year Africa’s share of global telecommunication between regions was<br />

116 Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, p. 9.<br />

117 Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. 11.<br />

118<br />

United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997, table 16, pp. 117-123.<br />

119<br />

Oral interview with Makunga.<br />

120<br />

United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997, table 15, pp. 111-116.<br />

121 UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, p. 185.<br />

97


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

2.7%. The United States <strong>and</strong> Canada had 55%. 122 If domestic traffic had been included in<br />

these figures, Africa’s share would have dropped further.<br />

Journalistic capacity is another indicator of the press’ potential power. <strong>Press</strong> free-<br />

dom is not a reality if the force to check institutions <strong>and</strong> powerful individuals is small. A<br />

rough survey of East Africa shows that the number of journalists in Kenya are 1,500-<br />

2,000, 123 in Tanzania 2,000, 124 <strong>and</strong> in Ug<strong>and</strong>a 400. 125 In other words, there are about<br />

20,000 inhabitants per each journalist. 126 In practice, even if East African journalists had<br />

extensive freedom they would not have capacity to perform critical journalism in a broad<br />

manner.<br />

Four Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> in East Africa<br />

In East Africa, the growth of press freedom can be analysed in four ways. First is the role<br />

of the press. Second is news gathering. Third is publishing. Fourth is protection of<br />

journalistic activities.<br />

Role of the <strong>Press</strong><br />

All the East African countries ensure more or less unreserved freedom of expression in<br />

their constitutions, 127 <strong>and</strong> at the same time have many laws regulating press freedom.<br />

Typical limitations are framed in laws on defamations or libels, sedition, penal codes,<br />

national security acts as well as acts on newspapers, broadcasting <strong>and</strong> films. 128 Altogether<br />

122<br />

Calculated on figures from: Aronson, “The communications <strong>and</strong> Internet recolution”, pp. 544-546.<br />

123<br />

Estimate made by Joseph Olweny, Editorial Manager at Nation Media Group Ltd., in conference in his<br />

office in Nation Centre in Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005.<br />

124<br />

Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. iii.<br />

125<br />

Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, p. vi.<br />

126<br />

Number of inhabitants from: Microsoft, Encarta Interactive World Atlas 2000, CD-rom.<br />

127<br />

Kenya: Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 101-104, Tanzania: Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.),<br />

A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. 1, Ug<strong>and</strong>a: Kemigisha (ed.), The State of the<br />

Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, p. 4.<br />

128<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 181-190 <strong>and</strong> 272-273; <strong>and</strong> Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A<br />

h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 1-9.<br />

98


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

these make up a web of strings to authorities, <strong>and</strong> any powerful individual, to interfere with<br />

the press’ conduct. In this way East Africa has a conditional press freedom. 129<br />

Laws protecting national interests are common in all democracies. But such laws in<br />

East Africa are extensive. One example is Tanzania’s Prisons Act of 1967 which bans jour-<br />

nalists to visit prisons, talk with prisoners, take photos, or for ex-prisoners to share their<br />

experience with journalists. 130 In that way Tanzania’s government removed a significant<br />

part of legal protection from public debate.<br />

Media is business based on incomes from markets. A major problem for East<br />

African media is small <strong>and</strong> poor markets due to poverty. Therefore it is difficult for<br />

African media to achieve economic growth <strong>and</strong> a sustainable economy which are supposed<br />

to support their independence. 131 Despite many attempts to start newspapers, bankruptcy is<br />

common. 132 Scanty advertising markets make governments advertising to be a major actor<br />

resulting in dependence. 133 One exception in East Africa is, however the Nation Media<br />

Group, based in Nairobi that runs commercial media business in all these three countries.<br />

In 2003 the group had a total sale of almost US$ 60 million where the profit before tax<br />

reached 20% of the sale. 134 There are some complaints on taxes, among these being the<br />

broadcast licence fees in Ug<strong>and</strong>a. 135 Tanzania’s waiver of some taxes against media is an<br />

unusual example in East Africa of public subsidies to support media. 136<br />

The media ensure their role by creating self-regulating bodies such as The Media<br />

Council of Kenya whose purpose is to keep government out of media operations. 137 In<br />

129<br />

Ogbondah, “Media Laws in Political Transition”, pp. 63-64 <strong>and</strong> 67.<br />

130<br />

Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. 7.<br />

131<br />

Carrington <strong>and</strong> Nelson, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics”, pp. 225-226.<br />

132<br />

Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, p. 18.<br />

133<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 168-170.<br />

134<br />

Nation Media Group Limited, Annual Report & Accounts / Ripoti Na Hesabu 2003, p. 22.<br />

135<br />

Nakkazi, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations”.<br />

136<br />

Oral interview with Makunga.<br />

137 nd<br />

The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya : 2 Edition<br />

(Nairobi: The Media Council of Kenya, 2004 [2002]), p. iii.<br />

99


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

1992 Kenya opened up to multi party political system accompanied by expansion of press<br />

freedom. Some politicians asked for regulations of media. As a reaction, The Media<br />

Industry Steering Committee (MISC) started to advocate self-regulation in the form of<br />

code of conduct <strong>and</strong> a media council. The Media Council of Kenya became operative in<br />

2004. The very first case came from the Minister of Information, Raphael Tuju versus<br />

Daily Nation. 138<br />

Stakeholders in MISC which runs the Media Council are The Kenya Union of<br />

Journalists, The Media Owners Association, Editors’ Guild of Kenya, The Alternative<br />

<strong>Press</strong>, Media Training Institutions, Kenya Correspondents’ Association, Media NGOs <strong>and</strong><br />

Public Media. 139 When a complaint is brought up, the procedure is first to try <strong>and</strong> mediate<br />

the dispute. If mediation does not work, the Media Council acts as a court. If dissatisfied,<br />

the complainant can bring the case before an ordinary court. The establishment of the<br />

Media Council is an attempt to enlarge the space for press freedom. 140<br />

Gathering Information<br />

The NWICO debate noted the lack of technology in poor countries <strong>and</strong> that the media in<br />

these countries are not properly equipped to access <strong>and</strong> gather information. In East Africa,<br />

lack of equipment is a bottleneck for access to information. 141<br />

The ethical side of information gathering is described in the Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong><br />

Practice of Journalism in Kenya. The code points out that comments from anyone who is<br />

mentioned in an unfavourable context should be obtained <strong>and</strong> that it is a professional<br />

obligation to protect confidential sources. Journalists should generally identify themselves,<br />

<strong>and</strong> not tape or record anyone without the person’s knowledge. In cases involving grief or<br />

138<br />

Oral interview with Esther Kamweru, Executive Director of The Media Council of Kenya, in her office in<br />

Nairobi, 10 th March, 2005, about the Media Council.<br />

139<br />

The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya, p. iv.<br />

140<br />

Oral interview with Kamweru.<br />

141<br />

UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, pp. 73-74 <strong>and</strong> 77-81.<br />

100


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

shock, journalists should behave with sensitivity <strong>and</strong> discretion. Media should generally<br />

avoid paying for information, unless public interest is involved. Financial information<br />

received in advance should not be used for own benefit, or be passed to others. As sources<br />

children have special protections. They should not be interviewed in the absence of a<br />

parent or other responsible adult, <strong>and</strong> not be approached or photographed at school without<br />

the permission of school authorities. 142 Concerning election coverage, there is a warning<br />

that media workers would be exposed to corrupt <strong>and</strong> manipulative sources <strong>and</strong> that media<br />

houses should provide journalists with adequate resources to cover elections. Journalists<br />

should resist gifts or favours from interested parties as this could compromise their<br />

impartiality. In addition, it is emphasised that journalists have a special responsibility to<br />

investigate electoral malpractices. 143<br />

Without free access to information, freedom of expression is like a vehicle without<br />

fuel. In East Africa, information <strong>and</strong> documents in public administration are not freely<br />

accessible. A journalist cannot invoke many legal rights to support a claim for information.<br />

As a result the practice of secrecy in East Africa creates informal business among officials<br />

where they leak to journalists for bribes. 144<br />

An example of how unauthorised information gathering is prevented is the<br />

Tanzanian Films <strong>and</strong> Stage Plays Act. Under this act it is illegal to use video camera for<br />

any purposes, even for private entertainment, any place in Tanzania without a ministerial<br />

permission. 145 In Kenya the practice is freer despite a similar law. 146<br />

142<br />

The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya, articles 1, 5, 6, 8,<br />

12, 14, 16 <strong>and</strong> 17.<br />

143<br />

The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct for Election Coverage (Nairobi: The Media Council of<br />

Kenya, 2002), articles 11, 13 <strong>and</strong> 14 as well as pp. 4 <strong>and</strong> 10.<br />

144<br />

Hydén <strong>and</strong> Leslie, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa”, p. 12; <strong>and</strong> Ogbondah, “Media Laws<br />

in Political Transition”, p. 59.<br />

145<br />

Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, p. 7, confirmed in oral<br />

interview with Makunga.<br />

146<br />

Barth, Kodi, “The laws needed for those with cameras” in The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />

Ltd.), commentary, 6 th March, 2005.<br />

101


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

In practice, it should not be impossible for capable journalists to get the information<br />

they really want. 147 In Tanzania practice depends on the actual medium’s attitude to<br />

government. Friendly journalists are treated with an extraordinary service including trans-<br />

port to ministers’ activities. ‘Enemies’ get nothing but a barrier. 148 In a society with poor<br />

markets <strong>and</strong> poor journalists, such practice make media vulnerable to corruption. 149<br />

In Kenya, the mainstream press are lobbying for a <strong>Freedom</strong> of Information Act<br />

which would turn the present principle of secrets upside down. 150 The Official Secrets Act<br />

says that it is an offence for any government official to communicate any information that<br />

he has obtained owing to his position to any person he is not authorised to communicate it<br />

to. 151 The Kenyan press wants, in principle, that everything is open information. From the<br />

lobbying part it is claimed that the Official Secrets Act contradicts democratic rights in the<br />

Constitution. A democratic society should allow free flow of information to increase the<br />

level of democracy, they have argued. In their opinion ‘secrets’ are ‘interests’. The press is<br />

capable of getting information despite the law. However, the journalists have to trust<br />

officials <strong>and</strong> treat them as confidential sources. But a problem is that officials have<br />

interests too, so such information is not always reliable. The areas of military <strong>and</strong> police<br />

are most secret, <strong>and</strong> it is argued that these areas also are where there is most corruption.<br />

The previous Kenyan government refused any open information policy. The recent<br />

government gives mixed signals, however, positive enough to be interpreted optimistically<br />

by the press. 152<br />

147<br />

Oral interview with Onyango-Obbo.<br />

148<br />

Oral interview with Makunga.<br />

149<br />

Kunczik, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, p. 249.<br />

150<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 159-160.<br />

151<br />

Ibid., pp. 115-116.<br />

152<br />

Oral interview with Muriithi Muriuki, Political Reporter at Daily Nation/Sunday Nation in Kenya, e-mail:<br />

fmuriithi@nation.co.ke. Interview with him at Nation Centre in Nairobi, 7 th March, 2005, about freedom<br />

of accessing information.<br />

102


Publishing<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Publishing transforms information into a force in society. Democratic values in conflict<br />

with publishing may be divided into categories as national <strong>and</strong> collective interests as well<br />

as private <strong>and</strong> individual interests. Each interest may have both legal <strong>and</strong> ethical aspects.<br />

National interests can be expressed in national security acts. The Tanzanian one, for<br />

instance, is modelled on a British act made in 1911. The act says that it is an offence to<br />

obtain, collect, record, publish or communicate to any person or any code, or password,<br />

article or information which might be or intended to be useful to a foreign power or<br />

disaffected person. The punishment of offence can be life imprisonment. Such conditions<br />

leave little space for press freedom. 153 Criminal laws that seek to protect the honour of the<br />

President or other state institutions <strong>and</strong> officials, is often wrapped up into laws on seditious<br />

libel. 154 The current Kenyan law on sedition has its origin in the colonial era whose<br />

purpose was to deny blacks freedom of expression. The law is still valid in Kenya but the<br />

practice has been lightened. 155<br />

Broadcasting media have superior positions in East Africa but airwaves are easy to<br />

control. Therefore, radio <strong>and</strong> TV, more than print media, have been controlled by<br />

governments in East Africa. 156 Despite liberalising, a firm grip is still maintained. For<br />

instance, in 2004 Ug<strong>and</strong>a temporarily closed down 33 FM stations. The dispute was about<br />

broadcasting fees, but all these radio stations represented alternative voices including<br />

foreign programmes. 157 Commercial radio may survive better that non-profit operators. But<br />

commercial radios are concentrated in urban areas where they have markets. Therefore,<br />

153<br />

Kilimwiko <strong>and</strong> Mapunda (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media in Tanzania, pp. 3-4.<br />

154<br />

Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, p. 198.<br />

155<br />

Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 272-274.<br />

156<br />

Carver, Coliver, Lauriciano, Lush <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Who Rules the Airwaves, p. 1, 7-8 <strong>and</strong> 33-39.<br />

157 Nakkazi, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations”<br />

103


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

rural people benefit less from this plurality. 158 That is also the case in Ug<strong>and</strong>a where<br />

community <strong>and</strong> non-commercial radios were most vulnerable to the boradcasting fees. 159<br />

Limitations on publishing due to national interests are common worldwide. The<br />

East African level is considered to be more restricted than in Western countries, but not<br />

very different from other poor countries. 160 Collective interests are typically formulated as<br />

public peace, hate speech as well as protecting morality <strong>and</strong> religion. 161 For instance,<br />

Kenya is more conservative than Ug<strong>and</strong>a in exposing body <strong>and</strong> sex, which makes a<br />

distinction in practice of publishing in the two countries. 162 Another collective value is<br />

democracy in itself. That is the reason for media to allow all parts to contribute in the<br />

public debate. The practice of this principle can be discussed. However, Kenyan media<br />

emphasise such an ideal in the very beginning of the Kenyan Code of Conduct of<br />

Journalism. 163<br />

Private interests may include both private institutions <strong>and</strong> individuals. There is<br />

danger of mixing private <strong>and</strong> national interests when the elite of political leaders <strong>and</strong><br />

business peoples are the same ones. 164 In East Africa, liberalisation of broadcasting has<br />

increased number of licenses. Yet, these radio <strong>and</strong> TV channels are concentrated in a few<br />

political h<strong>and</strong>s. 165 Another example is when the radio station Kiss FM in programs in April<br />

2004 used rough words about some Kenyan ministers as individuals. The ministers wanted<br />

to use government instruments as withdrawing of the licence to stop the radio station. 166<br />

158<br />

Carver, Coliver, Lauriciano, Lush <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Who Rules the Airwaves, p. 6.<br />

159<br />

Nakkazi, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations”<br />

160<br />

Walden, Ruth, “Insult Laws” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />

Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 212 <strong>and</strong> 220-222.<br />

161<br />

Krug <strong>and</strong> Price, “The Legal Environment for News Media”, pp. 200-201.<br />

162<br />

Onyango-Obbo, Charles, “Ug<strong>and</strong>ans like dirty pictures, so why faint at the V-word?” in The East African<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 28th February, 2005.<br />

163<br />

The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya, p. 2.<br />

164<br />

An-na’im, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right”, pp. 22-24.<br />

165<br />

Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, pp. 120-122.<br />

166<br />

Daily Nation, “They want to kill Kiss FM, says Kalonzo” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group),<br />

news article, 20 th April, 2004; <strong>and</strong> Shikwati, James, “It’s a potential threat to <strong>Press</strong> freedom” in Daily Nation<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 22 nd April, 2004.<br />

104


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

The case of Kiss FM became hot due to underlying conflicts. Kiss FM’s owner Patrick<br />

Quarcoo has some connections with former President Moi <strong>and</strong> Kiss FM is adversarial to<br />

the present government. In addition, Quarcoo is a rival to Macharia, owner of Royal Media<br />

with Citizen’s radio <strong>and</strong> TV. Citizen FM even jammed Kiss FM’s broadcasting signals for<br />

a while without any subsequent consequences. 167 Just before this situation, Kiss FM also<br />

had poached <strong>and</strong> headhunted five of Citizen FM’s prime time presenters. 168 The Kiss FM<br />

example illustrates how a mix of interests influence publishing <strong>and</strong> reactions to it.<br />

A barrier between editorial matters <strong>and</strong> the interests of the medium’s owner is not<br />

developed much in East Africa. 169 The press history reports a great number of incidents<br />

where media owners have used their power to pursue private interests through editorial<br />

content. This is a source of censorship in Kenyan media, <strong>and</strong> illustrates the mix of private,<br />

commercial <strong>and</strong> political interests. 170<br />

Insult regulations are in a democracy meant to be the arrangement which make<br />

balance between rights of privacy towards other rights including freedom of expression.<br />

These laws are extensive in East Africa, <strong>and</strong> are useful for anyone who obstructs what<br />

media are publishing. 171 It is even possible for individuals to bring bankrupcty on a<br />

medium by libel law. 172 The Media Council of Kenya tries to turn this practice in a more<br />

favourable direction for press freedom. The attempt is to maintain balance between free-<br />

dom of expression <strong>and</strong> the right of privacy by use of code of ethics instead of the law. 173<br />

Reporting on tragedies <strong>and</strong> crime, the practice of East African newspapers is to<br />

publish details <strong>and</strong> identifying informations. Here are two examples:<br />

167 Oral interview with Opanga.<br />

168 Wachira, “The unlikely media mogul”.<br />

169 Retief, Media Ethics, pp. 141 <strong>and</strong> 144-146; <strong>and</strong> “Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>” above.<br />

170 For instance: Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, pp. 83-85 <strong>and</strong> 99, Ochieng, I<br />

Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 55 <strong>and</strong> 63 (where Ochieng disagree with Kadhi); <strong>and</strong> Kadhi’s address “Is There a<br />

Place for Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” in Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005.<br />

171 Walden, “Insult Laws”, pp. 208-212 <strong>and</strong> 220-222. This general article also refers to Kenya <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a.<br />

172 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, p. 227.<br />

173 The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya, pp. i-ii.<br />

105


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

“TRAGEDY: Boy, 10, kills himself after book row with mother 174<br />

A 10-year-old boy killed himself after quarrelling with his mother over a<br />

lost textbook in Gatuanyaga village, Thika District. Police suspect Kelvin<br />

Muiruri Mburu wanted to escape his mother’s wrath. She is said to have<br />

threatened dire consequences if the mathematics book was not found.<br />

Central police spokesperson Dorothy Kavita said Ms Elizabeth Wangui had<br />

learnt of the book’s loss when a neighbour’s daughter stopped by to borrow<br />

it. […] the boy was found with a rope round his neck hanging from the grills<br />

of his bedroom window. […] ”<br />

“Girl, 4, is rescued by police after rape ordeal 175<br />

[…] the police yesterday rescued a four-year-old girl who had been denied<br />

treatment after a rape ordeal by her uncle at a remote Kilifi village. The girl<br />

was left to nurse her wounds after the incident last Friday after her family<br />

declined to report the matter, fearing a curse by the girl’s gr<strong>and</strong>father believed<br />

to be a wizard. […] repeatedly raped by her uncle […] The girl was too<br />

traumatised to speak about her ordeal. […] the minor’s gr<strong>and</strong>mother, Elisabeth<br />

Muruu […] It is believed that several girls in the area have been defiled<br />

by their relatives […] When the girl was finally brought, she could not st<strong>and</strong><br />

the sight of many people <strong>and</strong> immediately took to her heels. Her mother<br />

Mejumaa Bakari said she had caught the man red h<strong>and</strong>ed defiling her<br />

daughter. […] was shocked to find her daughter naked with the man lying<br />

on top of her. She said her brother-in-law left without uttering a word. On<br />

inspecting her daughter’s clothes she found out they had been soiled.[…] ”<br />

The first example shows the press covering single incidents of suicide. Even if it is a child<br />

who committed suicide, details of the act <strong>and</strong> possible motives are described. The article<br />

includes name of the victim who committed suicide, name of the mother who is both a<br />

victim <strong>and</strong> pointed out as ‘guilty’ as well as details about the course of events. The second<br />

example illustrates how the four year old girl is identified indirectly by use of the mother’s<br />

<strong>and</strong> gr<strong>and</strong>mother’s names <strong>and</strong> location. The uncle is identified in the same way. Some<br />

details about the abuse are revealed to the public too.<br />

‘Privileged information’ explains why some Kenyan cases are covered freely when<br />

others are tied up with anonymity, hidden points <strong>and</strong> modest descriptions – if these are<br />

covered at all. The different publishing practices in different cases reflect areas which are<br />

or are not included in the parliamentary immunity. In Kenya that includes parliamentary<br />

174<br />

Daily Nation, “Boy, 10, kills himself after book row with mother” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />

Group), news article, 27 th January, 2005.<br />

175<br />

Mudi, Maureen, “Girl, 4, is rescued by police after rape ordeal” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />

Ltd.), news article, 15 th January, 2005.<br />

106


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

committees <strong>and</strong> hearings as well as courts. The practice is that media are free to refer to<br />

what is said at these places <strong>and</strong> can cover cases almost without limits. Aspects which are<br />

not covered in these places, or other cases, are subjected to strong regulations of libels <strong>and</strong><br />

so on. The result is a dual practice of news publishing. 176<br />

’National security’ is often a reason for interfering with publishing. The Ug<strong>and</strong>an<br />

newspaper The Monitor reported in October 2002 about a helicopter which crashed in<br />

action against rebels in North. In this area, a civil war with the Lord Resistance Army<br />

(LRA) is going on. The two decade old conflict is described by United Nations as “among<br />

the worst humanitarian disasters in the world” having produced more than 1.5 million<br />

internally displaced people. 177 The Ug<strong>and</strong>an government claimed that the article was likely<br />

to endanger national security. The Monitor was raided by security personnel <strong>and</strong> closed<br />

down for 10 days. One <strong>and</strong> a half years later, the Ug<strong>and</strong>an Supreme Court ruled that there<br />

was no evidence to show that the helicopter report prejudiced national security. 178 Yet, the<br />

government achieved its objective to intimidate the involved journalists <strong>and</strong> editors for a<br />

while. The Monitor’s management suspect the action against the helicopter article to be a<br />

result of critical reports in the newspaper which had been harsh to the government. 179<br />

Protection of Journalistic Activities<br />

Traditionally, it is the authorities’ treatment of journalists <strong>and</strong> journalistic activities which<br />

have been the issue in dispute. Reported harassments targeting journalists in East Africa<br />

stretch from arresting, imprisoning, questionning, charging <strong>and</strong> stripping of citizenship,<br />

suing, expelling from certain places as well as closing radio stations <strong>and</strong> banning sources<br />

176 Makali (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice, pp. 156-165.<br />

177 <strong>International</strong> Crisis Group, Northern Ug<strong>and</strong>a : Underst<strong>and</strong>ing <strong>and</strong> solving the conflict, an <strong>International</strong><br />

Crisis Group Report (Nairobi/Brussels: <strong>International</strong> Crisis Group, 2004), ICG Africa Report Number 77,<br />

14 th April, 2004, pp. 1-2.<br />

178 Abdallah, Halima, “ ‘Monitor’ journalists win case over chopper report” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />

Media Group), news article, 1 st April, 2004; <strong>and</strong> Onyango-Obbo, Charles, “Ah, Ung<strong>and</strong>a’s <strong>Press</strong>: So Free,<br />

So Terrorised” in The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 5 th April, 2004.<br />

179 Oral interview with Onyango-Obbo.<br />

107


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

from seeing journalists. 180 The course in Ug<strong>and</strong>a illustrates an exercise in political control<br />

where journalists are jailed or brought before courts 10 times more than during the regimes<br />

of Obote <strong>and</strong> Amin before 1986. 181<br />

There are indications of improvements in free practice of journalism. For instance,<br />

in 2003 a delegate at Kenya’s National Constitutional Review Conference, Dr. Crispin O.<br />

Mbai, was killed. The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard brought the story “Mbai killers confess” 28 th<br />

September, 2003. The newspaper’s Managing Editor, David Makali, together with a police<br />

officer, were arrested <strong>and</strong> charged with theft of a copy of a videocassette which the article<br />

was supposed to be based on. 182 When the court made its judgement in 2005, a premise<br />

was that the real interest of the State had nothing to do with a theft of a cassette worth<br />

Kenyan shillings 500 which is equal to between six <strong>and</strong> seven American dollars. The<br />

State’s interest was to maintain a monopoly to release or withhold information. However,<br />

the defendants were found not guilty. It became the first time for a Kenyan court to regard<br />

constitutional press freedom <strong>and</strong> public’s right to know to be superior to interests of the<br />

State. 183<br />

The behaviour of private persons towards media does not follow a certain pattern.<br />

The powerful ones have wide ranging possibilities. For instance in use of libel laws to<br />

influence journalists. Another indication of private individual’s practice is the code of<br />

conduct which warns against manipulative sources that may use bribes or gifts. 184 Incidents<br />

180<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI Report 2003, pp. 27-28, 48 <strong>and</strong> 50.<br />

181<br />

Onyango-Obbo, Charles, “Ah, Ug<strong>and</strong>a’s <strong>Press</strong>: So Free, So Terrorised” in The East African (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), commentary, 5 th April, 2004.<br />

182<br />

Kadida, Jillo, “Editor <strong>and</strong> CID officer on theft charge” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group),<br />

news article, 2 nd October, 2003.<br />

183 th<br />

Mungai, Kibe, “Balanced justice” in The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), commentary, 10<br />

April, 2005.<br />

184<br />

The Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct for Election Coverage, p. 4.<br />

108


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

where the presence of journalists became controversial, resulting in attempts to lynch, have<br />

been reported. 185<br />

The editorial departments in media houses in East Africa are not protected from<br />

interference by its owners. The owners can influence editorial matters <strong>and</strong> single articles. If<br />

a journalist objects, he or she is vulnerable because of the high unemployment. The lucky<br />

ones who got a journalist’s job will not jeopardise it. To get fired means unemployment.<br />

To be safe, journalists do not challenge the bosses or owners. 186 Although the Nation<br />

Media Group has a declared policy that the editor has complete editorial control, that has<br />

not prevented editors from being dismissed when Muslim fellows of the dominant owner<br />

Aga Khan have been offended. 187<br />

“Mr Moneybags” is a case study in this aspect. It is a conflict between the press<br />

versus Kenyan cabinet ministers <strong>and</strong> other powerful individuals concerning use of criminal<br />

libel. It started when The St<strong>and</strong>ard used four pages on a story called “Mr Moneybags”. It<br />

detailed how an economic elite controls politics <strong>and</strong> the economy. Many prominent people<br />

were mentioned. 188 The reactions were strong from people indirectly accused of corrupt<br />

behaviour which they rejected. The writer, Kamau Ngotho, was charged with publishing<br />

defamatory matter contrary to the Kenyan Penal Code. Even an Associate Editor of the<br />

same newspaper was questioned by the Criminal Investigations Department. 189 It was the<br />

press’ turn to raise voices, supported by foreign donors <strong>and</strong> NGOs concerned with press<br />

freedom <strong>and</strong> human rights. In an editorial Daily Nation wrote:<br />

“It is shameful that Kenya under Narc still retains such repressive laws as<br />

criminal defamation, publishing false information <strong>and</strong> the ridiculous<br />

185<br />

For instance: Daily Nation, “ ‘Nation’ writer’s ordeal at GSU officer’s home” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), news article, 24 th February, 2005.<br />

186<br />

Kadhi, “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?”, p. 123.<br />

187<br />

Ochieng, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong>, pp. 60-61; <strong>and</strong> Odero, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview”, p. 13.<br />

188<br />

Ngotho, Kamau, “Mr Moneybags : EXCLUSIVE: In Kenya, politics <strong>and</strong> high finance are two sides of the<br />

same coin. And the game is played by the same people” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.),<br />

news article, 8 th January, 2005.<br />

189<br />

Murimi, Joseph, “ ‘St<strong>and</strong>ard’ writer faces libel charge” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.),<br />

news article, 14 th January, 2005.<br />

109


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

colonial offence of publishing an alarming statement. They are primitive<br />

laws […] It’s trying to intimidate the <strong>Press</strong> into not covering growing rot in<br />

government.” 190<br />

Eight foreign missions in Nairobi, including the United States <strong>and</strong> all the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian<br />

countries, followed up in a statement:<br />

“[…] use of criminal law is out of step with international practice. […] The<br />

criminal investigation department’s detention, upon orders of National Security<br />

Minister Murungaru, further heightens our concern. We would have<br />

expected that the police <strong>and</strong> the Ministry of Justice pursuit of accountability<br />

for corrupt activities would encourage investigations of those responsible,<br />

not seek to muzzle those who ask questions. […] must be aware that the use<br />

of criminal libel laws for political intimidation undercuts a vital pillar of<br />

society critical to the further development of democratic governance.” 191<br />

There was an ongoing conflict where the press <strong>and</strong> foreign missions frequently<br />

criticised NARC’s government of growing corruption within its own ranks. This conflict<br />

erupted after The St<strong>and</strong>ard’s article. After two weeks the Kenyan Attorney General<br />

dropped the case. He described the criminal libel law as archaic <strong>and</strong> advised the public to<br />

file civil suits for defamation rather than turn to the police. 192 In this case a Cabinet<br />

Minister’s attack against the press led to a massive pressure from the press assisted by<br />

foreign missions <strong>and</strong> civil society. The final result was even a step in direction of enlarged<br />

press freedom. However, a commentary after the case described how the Attorney<br />

General’s dismissing not was a victory for press freedom because it was only words, <strong>and</strong><br />

not a legally binding judgement. It would be better for press freedom if the case had come<br />

to court <strong>and</strong> the actual section of the Penal Code had been found unconstitutional, the<br />

commentary stated. The actual law is still Kenyan law – in the books. 193<br />

190 th<br />

Daily Nation, “Narc won’t cow the press” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), editorial, 13<br />

January, 2005.<br />

191<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Team, “Outrage by donors over press harassment” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.),<br />

news article, 13 th January, 2005.<br />

192<br />

Kago, Tony <strong>and</strong> Kadida, Jillo, “State drops libel case : Outdated law will never be used again, says Wako”<br />

in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 21 st January, 2005.<br />

193<br />

Mwaura, Peter, “Criminal libel: AG missed the real issue” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />

Group), commentary, 22 nd January, 2005.<br />

110


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Chapter 5: Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa Compared<br />

The regions of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa illustrate different practices of press freedom.<br />

The two regions have similarities <strong>and</strong> differences <strong>and</strong> still they interact.<br />

Contexts <strong>and</strong> Aspects of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

Growth of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

Among the similarities between the regions, is that each has some kind of press freedom.<br />

In both places, newspapers have spearheaded development of press freedom. Broadcasting<br />

has been more controlled, by regulations or as public broadcasters. Some liberalisation of<br />

the airwaves has taken place in all countries. In both regions, numerous organisations have<br />

emerged to advocate different interests, <strong>and</strong> these have big capacities in lobbying <strong>and</strong><br />

international networking. Self censorship exists at different levels in both regions, <strong>and</strong> the<br />

influence of global media is felt in both regions.<br />

There are also differences. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia’s democratisation processes started almost<br />

200 years earlier than that in East Africa <strong>and</strong> the levels of press freedom are different. In<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, the media’s role as a democratic actor is highly recognised at all levels of<br />

government. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, in particular Sweden, is the place of origin of codes of conduct<br />

<strong>and</strong> self-regulating systems within the press. Norway is the first place where the whole<br />

industry committed itself to regard the editor as the guarantor for editorial independence<br />

towards owners as well as other departments of the company. These Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian<br />

arrangements have subsequently become universal models. The level <strong>and</strong> capacity of<br />

media education have grown properly in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia.<br />

East Africa, with its colonial history, still has laws constructed by colonial masters.<br />

Such laws have survived because these are useful tools for the ruling elite to control the<br />

media. However, East Africa is going through changes that increase press freedom.<br />

111


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Another feature of growth of press freedom where East Africa is different from<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, is in the role of magazines <strong>and</strong> alternative press outside mainstream media. In<br />

East Africa these alternative media were key actors in challenging the limits to press<br />

freedom. They helped to exp<strong>and</strong> the scope <strong>and</strong> the level of press freedom in all East<br />

African countries.<br />

Reasons for <strong>and</strong> Forces Around <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

Both regions have adopted a common philosophical basis for press freedom. These are the<br />

search for truth, democracy, <strong>and</strong> support for individual liberty in a society. In practice, both<br />

regions object to interference from government in media operations.<br />

There are some differences. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, the editor’s judgement in all editorial<br />

matters is independent. In East Africa, editors are to a great degree affected by foreign<br />

owners <strong>and</strong> foreign commercial actors. Due to weak domestic markets, foreign media<br />

owners’ abuse their power <strong>and</strong> are a great threat to media in poor countries. 1 Another<br />

major issue in East Africa is how the elite influence <strong>and</strong> hamper media’s freedom. Finally,<br />

competing interests in East Africa use media to support their ‘development agenda’ which<br />

are not necessarily synonymous with press freedom.<br />

Mass Media in the Societies<br />

Despite different capacity, media have an important role all in these societies. These<br />

figures are calculations based on the surveys of each region in previous chapters.<br />

Number of radio <strong>and</strong> TV receivers per 1000 inhabitants (1996)<br />

Average per country TV Radio<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia 525 998<br />

East Africa 15 173<br />

Proportion (Sc : EA) 35 : 1 6 : 1<br />

1 Okonkwo, “Journalists in a Developing Economy”, pp. 6-9.<br />

112


Spread of daily newspapers (1996)<br />

Average per country Number of<br />

titles<br />

Total<br />

circulation<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Circulation per<br />

1000 inhabitants<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia 71 2,900,000 449<br />

East Africa 3 141,000 5<br />

Proportion (Sc : EA) 24 : 1 21 : 1 87 : 1<br />

Number of new published book titles (1996)<br />

Average per country New book titles Titles per<br />

1000 inhabitants<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia 10,916 1.8<br />

East Africa 253 0.009<br />

Proportion (Sc : EA) 43 : 1 196 : 1<br />

Journalistic capacity<br />

Average per country Number of<br />

journalists<br />

Inhabitants per<br />

journalist<br />

Jour. per 1000<br />

inhabitants<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia 11,333 548 1.82<br />

East Africa 1,383 19,545 0.05<br />

Proportion (Sc : EA) 8 : 1 1 : 36 36 : 1<br />

Access to internet <strong>and</strong> telecommunication media in East Africa is very low while it<br />

is high in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. In 2000, access of internet in Africa was estimated at 1 of 1500<br />

persons. The worldwide average was 1 of 38, <strong>and</strong> in the West it was 1 of 4. 2 Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian<br />

countries are even ranked at the top within the group of among Western countries. 3<br />

From all angles, the figures confirm one of the major issues in the NWICO debate,<br />

the great difference in means of mass communications in the North compared to the South.<br />

Further, the figures indicate how the differences are higest in elite oriented media, in<br />

particular books <strong>and</strong> daily circulation of newspapers. The differences are least in spread of<br />

radio. East Africa, as other poor regions, is poorly equipped compared to rich countries.<br />

2 Ogundimu, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa”, p. 220.<br />

3 UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000, p. 270.<br />

113


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

There is also the questions of the capacity of a free press. East Africa has less<br />

capacity than Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. The ‘journalistic capacity’ indicates how strong media are able<br />

to play their role as watchdog. Even if the level of press freedom was similar in the two<br />

regions, it would be different in practice. Each journalist in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia caters for about<br />

500 people, in East Africa each journalist caters for about 20,000 people. This makes the<br />

abilities to fulfil media’s social responsibility different.<br />

The Aspect of the <strong>Press</strong>’ Role<br />

Similarities of the role of the press in these countries are to be found in the constitutions,<br />

they all guarantee freedom of expression although the practice is different. Countries in<br />

both regions regard media self-regulation as a way of maintaining independence. In this,<br />

the Sc<strong>and</strong>inavinans are ahead of the East Africans.<br />

Countries in both regions have a number of laws whose purposes are different.<br />

Regulations in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia ensure diversity or other democratic values. Similar reasons are<br />

used for some arrangements of financial incentives to the press in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. In East<br />

Africa such practice has recently emerged in Tanzania where some taxes on media have<br />

been waived. Other financial incentives to media in East Africa have been given due to<br />

rulers’ propag<strong>and</strong>a aims or national ownership. In all countries in these regions, public<br />

funded state owned broadcasters have had a prominent role. A major problem for East<br />

African media is poor markets due to poverty. Welfare <strong>and</strong> good markets can provide<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media with a quite different level of income. These resources are employed<br />

in an extensive journalistic capacity. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media’s resources <strong>and</strong> position make<br />

them powerful in advocating their own interests in the society.<br />

114


The Aspect of Gathering Information<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Similarities are few in information gathering between the two regions. The major similarity<br />

is probably what codes of conduct advise on relations to sources. Ethical issues such as<br />

independence, fairness, securing sources, <strong>and</strong> modesty in some situations in particular with<br />

regard to children, are similiar. These common features illustrate how codes of conduct in<br />

these regions have similar roots.<br />

The differences are most clear when it comes to information from public admini-<br />

strations. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia the principle is openness with some exceptions. In East Africa the<br />

principle is secrets with some exceptions. The outlet in East Africa is a journalistic practice<br />

which nevertheless may provide a lot of information into the public sphere. Due to this<br />

‘hidden game’ much of this information is controlled or coloured by actors with vested<br />

interests. Another major difference is in the tools available for information gathering. Due<br />

to widespread access to internet in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> a huge amount of relevant information<br />

to dig up, the journalists there are far ahead of their colleagues in East Africa.<br />

The Aspect of Publishing<br />

Similarities seem to be evident because media in the two regions look similar. Commercial<br />

forces work in the same way. The same methods are used in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />

to attract audiences. Further, codes of conduct are guided by the same philosophy. That<br />

philosophy also explains why media practitioners in these regions share preferences in<br />

publishing policy.<br />

Differences are clear in balancing between laws <strong>and</strong> ethics. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia the laws<br />

are not very restrective. Decisive factors in publishing are the medium’s own policy<br />

together with the national code of conduct. In East Africa the laws usually impose a<br />

restrective framework. Culture is a determinant factor for ethics. Taste, shame, respect,<br />

fear <strong>and</strong> faith, for instance, are interpreted differently in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian cultures compared to<br />

115


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

cultures in East Africa. Such values guide selection <strong>and</strong> approaches to content. Such<br />

cultural values explain differences in publishing practices. Further, East African practice is<br />

influenced by British traditions which are different from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia in these matters. 4<br />

Concerning reports on crimes, Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media ethics tend to support a Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian<br />

criminal policy that is more concerned with rehabilitation than with punishment. 5<br />

The Aspect of Protection of Journalistic Activities<br />

Similarities in the two regions are most clear in declared media ethics. These concern<br />

protection <strong>and</strong> independence towards authorities, external commercial forces, owners <strong>and</strong><br />

other private actors. The ideals within the press are similar in the two regions.<br />

Differences are large when it comes to the practice in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa.<br />

A journalist in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia risks some harsh words. That is nothing compared to<br />

colleagues in East Africa who risk harassment <strong>and</strong> danger, even though the possible<br />

assassination of journalists has subsided. In Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, courts have expressed views that<br />

journalists should enjoy extraordinary protection, just the way it is for government officials<br />

on duty. The reason is that the media perform an important function in society. Such kind<br />

of notion has started to emerge in East Africa when an editor in 2005 was found not guilty<br />

of theft of a videocassette. The Kenyan court said the theft was not an issue when it<br />

considered the importance of the revealed information for the society as being more<br />

important than the State’s information monopoly. However, the everyday life for<br />

journalists in East Africa is different from that in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia. The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian model of<br />

barriers between owners <strong>and</strong> editorial departments is the ideal in East Africa, but it is not<br />

upheld as a principle.<br />

4 Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, p. 74.<br />

5 Jones, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils, p. 31.<br />

116


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Interactions Between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />

Interactions between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa are conducted in several ways. There are<br />

direct links where press freedom is the matter. Further, both regions interact indirect<br />

because both are subordinated to the same global regimes of press freedom.<br />

Direct Links Between Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries do not have long traditions for activities in East Africa. From the<br />

time of independence, East African countries became recipients of development aid from<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries. These regional connections emerged despite lack of earlier<br />

connections. 6 The level of trade between the two regions is modest. Aid was given both as<br />

bilateral <strong>and</strong> multilateral assistance. In addition, support from private institutions as well as<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian governments through NGOs are common. 7 All the East African countries<br />

have been through periods where aid from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia more or less was cancelled. 8 On a<br />

personal level, the Tanzanian President Julius K. Nyerere developed strong bonds with the<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavians. 9<br />

All Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries include media or press freedom as conditions for giving<br />

aid. This can be in policy declarations, as a part of ‘good governance’ conditionalities tied<br />

to aid, or as support to specific media projects. The following examples illustrate how<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian aid influence press freedom in East Africa. First, Norway <strong>and</strong> Sweden, in<br />

Tanzania in 2004, sponsored the annual World Association of <strong>Press</strong> Councils Conference<br />

6 Simensen, Jarle, 1952-1975: Norge møter den tredje verden : Norsk utviklingshjelps historie 1 (Bergen,<br />

Norway: Fagbokforlaget, 2003), pp. 135-136 <strong>and</strong> 197.<br />

7 Ibid., pp. 135-170, 215 <strong>and</strong> 268.<br />

8 Ibid., pp. 182-183 (Ug<strong>and</strong>a); <strong>and</strong> Ruud, Arild Engelsen, 1975-1989: Vekst, velvilje og utfordringer : Norsk<br />

utviklingshjelps historie 2 (Bergen, Norway: Fagbokforlaget, 2003), pp. 167-168 (Tanzania) <strong>and</strong> 257-258<br />

(Kenya).<br />

9 Simensen, 1952-1975: Norge møter den tredje verden, pp. 141-142.<br />

117


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

worth about US$ 50,000. 10 Second, Sweden supports training of journalists in Tanzania. 11<br />

Third, in Ug<strong>and</strong>a, Denmark <strong>and</strong> Norway together made survey of hindrances for local<br />

media to report on human rights, corruption <strong>and</strong> conflicts. 12 Fourth, Norway has come up<br />

with a media plan for Ug<strong>and</strong>a. This one includes proposals to establish a rural press club,<br />

a foundation for summoned journalists, developing of a diploma course in journalism, <strong>and</strong><br />

a campaign for a new media policy. 13 Fifth, in 2004 Norway resumed bilateral aid to<br />

Kenya, 13 years after Kenya cancelled it due to bad diplomatic relations. The Norwegian<br />

Agency for Development Cooperation (NORAD) started a process which probably would<br />

end up with a media plan for Kenya. 14 Sixth, Sweden sponsored community radios in all<br />

the East African countries, <strong>and</strong> supported a media NGO training journalists in focusing on<br />

needs of the poor. 15<br />

At the level of NGOs concerning media, individuals from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East<br />

Africa interact with each other. For example, in IPI both members from Norway <strong>and</strong> Swe-<br />

den as well as Kenya have had prominent positions. The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries have been<br />

well represented in the Board of Executives since its founding, 16 had the directorship, 17 <strong>and</strong><br />

hosted the General Assembly four times. 18 For Kenya, Tom Mboya became a key figure<br />

during the 1960s. He was invited as a prominent speaker to the General Assembly in Paris<br />

10 The Media Council of Tanzania, “Norwegian Embassy donates 24 m/- for WAPC conference” in Media<br />

Watch (Dar es Salaam: The Media Council of Tanzania, 2004), no. 56, Aug. 2004; <strong>and</strong> The Media Council<br />

of Tanzania, “Supporters of the WAPC conference in Bagamoyo” in Media Watch, no. 59, Nov. 2004.<br />

11 The Media Council of Tanzania, “SIDA okays 47 m/- for starting centre for training of journos” in Media<br />

Watch, no. 57, Sept. 2004.<br />

12 Norad, “Medierapport fra Ug<strong>and</strong>a”, internal memo, Norad, Oslo, Norway, 12 th October, 2004, archive<br />

reference 842.0.<br />

13 Ibid.<br />

14 Correspondance with Tone Bratteli, Senior Advisor, The Norwegian Agency for Development<br />

Cooperation, received e-mail 24 th January, 2005. E-mail: tone.bratteli@norad.no.<br />

15 Correspondance with Cecilia Bäckl<strong>and</strong>er, Diplomat at the Swedish Embassy in Nairobi, e-mail received<br />

11 th March, 2005. E-mail: cecilia@rosslyn.co.ke.<br />

16 <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, IPI – The First Ten Years, pp. 12-13, Coppard, IPI: The Defence of <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Freedom</strong>, p. 128; <strong>and</strong> The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1950-2000, pp. 8 amd 82.<br />

17 The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1950-2000, p. 29.<br />

18 <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, “IPI Congresses” in 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna (Vienna: The<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003), p. 49.<br />

118


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

in 1962, <strong>and</strong> was involved in IPI’s Nairobi training program for African journalists. 19<br />

Nairobi hosted the IPIs annual conference in 1981 <strong>and</strong> will do it again in 2005. 20 The 2005<br />

Chairman of IPI is Wilfred Kiboro, CEO of Nation Media Group. 21<br />

IPI is only one example of how international press freedom NGOs make up a<br />

network where individuals <strong>and</strong> institutions influence each other globally. In such a way,<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian <strong>and</strong> East African individuals, institutions <strong>and</strong> NGOs participate in this global<br />

web for the spread of press freedom.<br />

Relations to Global Regimes of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

<strong>International</strong> regimes contribute to press freedom both in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa, two<br />

regions which are minor actors in a global struggle for press freedom. All these countries<br />

are members of the United Nations <strong>and</strong> UNESCO. They are members of the same<br />

international regime on press freedom. Both regions are subordinated to the global<br />

influence of the United States on press freedom. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia has a lot of similarities to the<br />

United States because they are part of the common political philosophy <strong>and</strong> development<br />

in Western countries. Concerning self-regulation, Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia has spearheaded a<br />

development which was adopted by the United States. 22 Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia maintains its role as<br />

global spearhead for media ethics <strong>and</strong> has had great impact on new democracies in Eastern<br />

Europe. 23 Both regions are subjected to the international press freedom regimes, but the<br />

difference is that East Africa has less influence in the policy formulation.<br />

19<br />

Righter, IPI: The Undivided Word, p. 84.<br />

20<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, “IPI Congresses” in 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna, p. 49.<br />

21 th<br />

The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>: “Executive Board”, http://www.freemedia.at/cvs.htm, downloaded 28<br />

March, 2005. IPI’s homepage: http://www.freemedia.at/<br />

22<br />

Herbert, Practising Global Journalism, pp. 68-69; <strong>and</strong> Clement, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils,<br />

pp. 30-32.<br />

23<br />

Carrington <strong>and</strong> Nelson, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics”, p. 235.<br />

119


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

While Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian media have followed similar trends to those of other Western<br />

countries, 24 East Africa is new in media commercialisation. Conerning democracy, all East<br />

African countries have adopted liberal ideals including the principle of press freedom. But<br />

this has happened about 200 years later than in the West, which explains its moderate<br />

level.<br />

The conflicting issues on press freedom in East Africa today are similar to conflicts<br />

in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia decades or even a century before. One example is the freedom to access<br />

information which is an issue in East Africa. After years of struggle it was implemented by<br />

laws in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia in 1970. 25 Another example is establishing of self-regulation which is<br />

happening in East Africa now. 26 That was a reality in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia around the 1920s. 27<br />

Both Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian <strong>and</strong> East African media <strong>and</strong> individuals are well connected to<br />

international NGOs concerned with press freedom. However, a difference is that East Afri-<br />

cans have client relations to these NGOs. A common pattern is that Sc<strong>and</strong>inavians are<br />

donors <strong>and</strong> East Africans are the recipients. 28 Sc<strong>and</strong>inavians are involved in formulating of<br />

policy, East Africans are adopters of that policy. 29 In education there are similar patterns of<br />

universal st<strong>and</strong>ardisation. The difference is that East Africa plays the role of client. Aid<br />

from Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian donors has funded schools of journalism in East Africa. 30 The concepts<br />

in the dicipline of journalism is developed in the West <strong>and</strong> exported to journalism schools<br />

in poor countries. 31 Concerning codes of conduct Sc<strong>and</strong>inavians have participated in<br />

24<br />

Dahlgren, “Media <strong>and</strong> power transitions in a small country: Sweden”p. 251<br />

25<br />

Eide, Den redigerende makt, p. 115.<br />

26<br />

Oral interview with Kamweru.<br />

27<br />

Clement, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils, pp. 18-19, 28-29 <strong>and</strong> 30-32.<br />

28<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, “<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Fund” in 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna, p. 7; <strong>and</strong> oral<br />

interview with Kamweru.<br />

29<br />

One example: Coppard, IPI: The Defence of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>, pp. 127-128 <strong>and</strong> 133.<br />

30<br />

Three examples: 1) Sweden in Tanzania: The Media Council of Tanzania, “SIDA okays 47 m/- for starting<br />

centre for training of journos” in Media Watch, Sept. 2004, 2) Norwegian <strong>and</strong> Danish survey conclusion in<br />

proposed support to education in Ug<strong>and</strong>a: Norad, “Medierapport fra Ug<strong>and</strong>a”, section 5, 3) Norway to the<br />

University of Nairobi: Bourgault, Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa, p. 128.<br />

31<br />

In general: Merrill, Global Journalism, p. 213. One example about Norway in Ethiopia: Eikje, “God<br />

journalistikk er en vaktbikkje”.<br />

120


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

development of globally accepted principles. In East Africa a common opinion has been<br />

that it is not necessary to invent the wheel again. The Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of<br />

Journalism in Kenya was made after consultations with key players of press freedom in<br />

Engl<strong>and</strong>, Minnesota <strong>and</strong> Australia in addition to Tanzania. 32<br />

The United States interferes directly with press freedom affairs. One example is<br />

how such a dominant player even has selected individuals from East Africa who became<br />

prominent international representatives. For instance, it is claimed that Tom Mboya, who<br />

was an early authority about Kenyan press freedom, was brought up as an international<br />

political representative by the British <strong>and</strong> Americans. 33 Another example is how<br />

Americans connected with Ronald Reagan funded the Nairobi Law Monthly during Moi’s<br />

dictatorship to ensure one of the few critical voices against the regime. 34<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa are subordinated to forces conducting economic<br />

globalisation which include influence over press freedom regimes. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries<br />

are included in international regimes on press freedom. They have a prominent position to<br />

influence <strong>and</strong> formulate global press freedom as well as influence agents supporting global<br />

spread of press freedom. The East African states have been members of the international<br />

regimes on press freedom. The difference is East Africa’s subordinate client role, <strong>and</strong> level<br />

of press freedom which reflects a shorter period of democratic rule.<br />

32 Oral interview with Kamweru.<br />

33 Munene, Macharia: “The Colonial Policies of Segregating the Kikuyu, 1920 – 1964” in Chemchemi<br />

(Nairobi: Kenyatta University <strong>and</strong> Acacia Publishers), volume 2, 2002, number 1, p. 40.<br />

34 Munene, “Africans <strong>and</strong> Intellectual Adventurism: East African Intellectual Warriors”, p. 8.<br />

121


Chapter 6: Conclusion<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong> in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />

<strong>Press</strong> freedom is rarely openly rejected. However, different forces compete to bend press<br />

freedom to serve their interests. The democratic purpose of press freedom is to create<br />

transparency <strong>and</strong> participation through free flows of information which maximise social,<br />

political <strong>and</strong> cultural outcomes in a society. The thesis has examined the spread of press<br />

freedom in context of globalisation. North-South perspectives have appeared due to the<br />

attention to the regions of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa.<br />

The objective, to provide underst<strong>and</strong>ing of press freedom as a global concept, has<br />

employed four approaches. First, to establish underst<strong>and</strong>ing of globalisation context.<br />

Second, to establish underst<strong>and</strong>ing of the concept of press freedom. Third, to describe <strong>and</strong><br />

compare practices of press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa. Fourth, to give a<br />

balanced description of press freedom in context of globalisation.<br />

First, globalisation interconnects peoples in the world to be more influenced by<br />

each other. Yet, economic globalisation has concentrated power into a few h<strong>and</strong>s which<br />

control a hegemony. These global economic interests create <strong>and</strong> benefit from a global<br />

audience which acts as like-minded consumers. The history of modern economic<br />

globalisation starts with colonial empires. After the Second World War the United States<br />

succeeded as the spearhead of globalisation. A world trade regime where American<br />

business people became masters was created. After the Cold War it became the worldwide<br />

order.<br />

<strong>Globalisation</strong> has a number of characteristic features. First is the hierarchy of states<br />

where the United States <strong>and</strong> a few others maintain a hegemony. Second, while some<br />

countries such as China, India, Malaysia as well as Mexico <strong>and</strong> Turkey benefit from<br />

increased global trade, countries in Africa have been further marginalised. Third, is the<br />

122


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

declined role of state governments as the powers of business <strong>and</strong> civil society have<br />

increased. Economic power has moved to a global level, political power has mainly<br />

remained at state level. Media are among those whose power has increased.<br />

Mass media became global business, just as in other industries. News agencies<br />

created a global network between Western newspapers. Radio bypassed geographic<br />

borders. The film industry became global business linking Hollywood’s film production to<br />

Wall Street’s finance markets <strong>and</strong> to a global audience. Recorded music gave the pattern of<br />

concentrated ownerships. Television became powerful in spreading a global culture, shared<br />

news <strong>and</strong> has created an arena for global advertising. Internet was spread globally most<br />

rapidly. Despite internet’s openness, its dominant owners <strong>and</strong> content producers are the<br />

same who dominate other media. A few conglomerates have emerged as big transnational<br />

companies in media business, control global media, <strong>and</strong> heavily influence regional media.<br />

With such influence, the nature of the press became an issue.<br />

A functional definition of press freedom is media’s right to discuss whatever is not<br />

explicitly forbidden by law. Another approach is press freedom as a ‘regime’ which<br />

supposes that information resources are significantly independent of political or economic<br />

powers. The latter give attention to press freedom as means of power. Constructivism<br />

theory emphasises roles of regimes, agents <strong>and</strong> circumstances. Agents are actors that<br />

pursue or influence press freedom regimes. <strong>Press</strong> freedom itself is agent of democracy <strong>and</strong><br />

globalisation.<br />

The idea of press freedom grew out of the Enlightenment. John Locke made basis<br />

for freedom of expression as a civil right. His theory says that government needs support<br />

from the governed, <strong>and</strong> that people have the right of revolution including a duty to rise up<br />

against tyrants. In the United States in 1735, John Peter Zenger was found not guilty in a<br />

case on seditious libel. The defence was that he had published the truth. This is the first<br />

known trial which accepted truth as reason for press freedom. In 1791 the United States’<br />

123


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

constitution made a model for press freedom in democracy: “Congress shall make no law<br />

… abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press”. In the mid of the 20 th century John<br />

Stuart Mill’s “Essay on Liberty” influenced further development of philosophy about press<br />

freedom. He was concerned with plurality including the right to be wrong. Mill made basis<br />

for the marketplace of ideas as it was termed later. In 1948 The Universal Declaration of<br />

Human Rights made freedom of expression <strong>and</strong> press freedom to universal rights. At the<br />

same time the press’ social responsibility was regarded as media’s democratic aim.<br />

Growth of press freedom followed democratisation. In the beginning decision<br />

processes were moved out of kings’ <strong>and</strong> rulers’ domains into the public spheres.<br />

Journalism <strong>and</strong> mass media emerged out of this development <strong>and</strong> new technology. As<br />

media <strong>and</strong> press freedom grew, everyone with access to media participated the democracy<br />

as the press served to check government <strong>and</strong> others with power. In the process measures<br />

favouring a free press developed in terms of constitutional support, reduced restrictions,<br />

efficient self-regulating system, <strong>and</strong> economic conditions which ensure financial<br />

independence. There was increased access to information, protection of sources, <strong>and</strong><br />

freedom to publish without permission. <strong>Freedom</strong> to publish, however, took into account<br />

the need for self-restrictions on national security, sensitive state matters as well as<br />

protection of privacy or some other private interests. There was also protection of<br />

journalistic activities towards authorities, private actors or even the owners’ interference<br />

with editorial matters.<br />

The regions of Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa represent different practices of press<br />

freedom. Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia ranks at the top of press freedom in the world. The growth started in<br />

the 18 th century as part of liberal trends in the Western world. The European Court of<br />

Human Rights harmonised Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian practice with Europe. Among means of press<br />

freedom originated in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia are self-regulation, media council, media ombudsman,<br />

<strong>and</strong> the editor as guarantor of editorial independence. Reasons for press freedom have been<br />

124


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

search for truth, democracy <strong>and</strong> individual liberty. Earlier, intereference from government<br />

was the concern of press freedom. Later years, external <strong>and</strong> internal commercial forces<br />

have got attention as a threat to press freedom. Mass media are extensively spread in<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, in particular print media <strong>and</strong> internet. Privatisation of public sector has made<br />

reduced access to information to an issue. Publishing has legal restrictions towards national<br />

security, discriminations of religious, ethnic or sexual character as well as blasphemy,<br />

pornography, regulations of commercial messages, <strong>and</strong> areas of privacy <strong>and</strong> libels. Yet,<br />

ethics is a chief guide for publishing. Journalism is regarded as an activity in society which<br />

deserve extraordinary protection. Harassment of journalists is uncommon.<br />

East African countries are still in an early phase of democratisation which is<br />

reflected in the level of press freedom. Democracy is a declared goal <strong>and</strong> a lot of processes<br />

are going on towards improved press freedom. A paradox is that East Africa still struggles<br />

with restrictive press laws enacted during the colonial period. Then, the colonial masters<br />

used media as propag<strong>and</strong>a <strong>and</strong> to achieve control of information. In East Africa, reasons<br />

for press freedom have been search for truth, democracy <strong>and</strong> individual liberty. Some<br />

specific matters surrounding press freedom in East Africa have been ownership <strong>and</strong> the<br />

impact of global media.<br />

The ruling elites manipulated media to serve their own interests <strong>and</strong> promoted<br />

development journalism as means of national building. Development journalism, critics<br />

noted, was a way of reducing press freedom. While all the East African countries declare<br />

press freedom in their constitutions, a web of restrictive laws reduce the scope of freedom<br />

considerably. Among the restrictions to press freedom are that government documents of<br />

public interest remain secret. Other obstacles include the poor training of journalists <strong>and</strong><br />

weak markets that do not provide media with ability to operate as independent business.<br />

Within East Africa there are some different practices in terms of self-regulation.<br />

For instance, Kenyan media are relatively free from government, but suppressed by private<br />

125


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

individuals who have many ways to sue the media. In Ug<strong>and</strong>a it is the opposite.<br />

Government suppress media – as far as possible under sceptical donors’ monitoring.<br />

However, the level of press freedom in East Africa is increasing.<br />

Spread of media indicate media’s position in the societies, <strong>and</strong> is quite different:<br />

Comparing of spread of media<br />

in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia <strong>and</strong> East Africa<br />

Proportion<br />

Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia : East Africa<br />

Number of TV receivers per 1000 inhabitant 35 : 1<br />

Number of radio receivers per 1000 inhabitant 6 : 1<br />

Circulation of newspapers per 1000 inhabitant 87 : 1<br />

Published book titles per 1000 inhabitants 196 : 1<br />

Journalistic capacity: Journalists per 1000 inhabitants 36 : 1<br />

The statistics confirm the existence of a big gap between the regions, <strong>and</strong> that print media<br />

are luxury items in East Africa. The figures on journalistic capacity indicate different<br />

media’s ability to fulfill their role. Different levels of press freedom increase the real gap in<br />

journalistic capacity.<br />

The NWICO debate exposed such differences between North <strong>and</strong> South. The<br />

debates exposed Western media’s dominance in agenda setting, definition of truth, <strong>and</strong> the<br />

West’s superiority in terms of technology. Although the debates have cooled down, the<br />

differences have increased between poor <strong>and</strong> rich countries.<br />

Links between the two regions support the spread of press freedom in East Africa.<br />

The Sc<strong>and</strong>inavian countries impose conditions of press freedom in their aid policy, <strong>and</strong><br />

also support to media projects in East Africa. There are also significant interactions<br />

through international press freedom NGOs. Yet, the most influential link is probably that<br />

both regions are exposed to the same international regimes on press freedom.<br />

In the context of globalisation, press freedom serves as a tool of political influence.<br />

<strong>International</strong> press freedom regimes can be legal conventions, institutions or NGOs. One<br />

such regime is the United Nations with its Article 19 on the Universal Declaration of<br />

126


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Human Rights concerning freedom of information. UNESCO is the United Nations special<br />

agency in this matter. Thus, the global human rights machinery promotes press freedom.<br />

Agents promoting press freedom regimes can be institutions, organisations,<br />

individuals <strong>and</strong> invisible forces. There are mainly four of these. First, the World Bank<br />

spreads press freedom because it is supposed to support development. Second, NGOs are<br />

agents <strong>and</strong> constitute a global movement <strong>and</strong> network for press freedom. Third, the<br />

globalising of media ethics narrows <strong>and</strong> strengthens the concept of press freedom. Fourth,<br />

harmonised journalism education <strong>and</strong> professionalisation strengthens press freedom<br />

globally.<br />

Circumstances supportive of international press freedom regimes are four. First,<br />

liberal market economy creates a symbiotic relationship with notions of press freedom.<br />

Markets provide media with economic independence to act freely. Second, a shared culture<br />

supports the growth of global media <strong>and</strong> promotion of global media freedom. Third, civil<br />

society develop partnership with media to promote free media. Fourth, in a democracy free<br />

media legitimises democratic rule. Those who benefit from a democratic system support<br />

media due to its stabilising effect.<br />

The spread of the global media raised three types of criticism. Firstly, the press has<br />

been accused of maintaining hegemony of ruling elites <strong>and</strong> being manipulated to benefit<br />

only the elite. Proprietors of global media are the same, or like-minded to, as other owners<br />

of global businesses. <strong>Press</strong> freedom is used to mean business freedom, <strong>and</strong> the spread of<br />

free media means increasing markets. Media’s social responsibility, therefore, ranks below<br />

profits for the media owners. Free media’s ability to stabilise existing order is also in the<br />

interest of the elite.<br />

Secondly, there are questions as to whether press freedom in reality supports<br />

democracy <strong>and</strong> human rights. There have been double st<strong>and</strong>ards in terms of application<br />

<strong>and</strong> expectations. The United States has been accused of double st<strong>and</strong>ards in its promotion<br />

127


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

of democracy <strong>and</strong> human rights because it has supported regimes that violate these values.<br />

Some countries have claimed that the Universal Declaration on Human Rights is not their<br />

document. They were not members of the United Nations when the declaration was formu-<br />

lated in 1948. Those who issued the declaration in 1948 had colonies or denied large<br />

segments of their population democratic rights.<br />

Thirdly, from an African point of view, there are doubts as to whether concepts of<br />

press freedom have validity to Africa. The debate on neo-colonialism regards media <strong>and</strong><br />

press freedom as means for the West to dominate the South. Other neo-colonial forces are<br />

foreign ownership of African media as well as the West’s dominance over the content. A<br />

ruling African elite has adopted Western values <strong>and</strong> style of media. They use media to<br />

maintain their own hegemony in the same way as a global elite uses global media.<br />

The picture that emerges is that press freedom is a universal concept but it has<br />

different practices. <strong>Globalisation</strong> has spread <strong>and</strong> harmonised press freedom globally <strong>and</strong><br />

yet real threats to global press freedom exist because of the forces competing for power in<br />

globalised societies. These forces do not attack press freedom openly, they do it indirectly.<br />

They attack press freedom by creating conditions which subordinate the media’s social<br />

responsibility <strong>and</strong> at the same time stress profit, politics or power. This is the case globally,<br />

in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia, <strong>and</strong> in East Africa.<br />

128


Bibliography <strong>and</strong> Sources<br />

Published Primary Sources<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Government Documents<br />

Datta-Mitra, Jayati (ed.), Ug<strong>and</strong>a : Policy, Participation, People (Washington: The World<br />

Bank, 2001)<br />

Jones, J. Clement, Mass Media Codes of Ethics <strong>and</strong> Councils : A comparative international<br />

study on professional st<strong>and</strong>ards (Paris: UNESCO <strong>Press</strong>, 1980)<br />

Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 1996:12 : Medieombud<br />

(Oslo: Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 1996)<br />

________, Norges offentlige utredninger : NOU 2003:30 : Ny offentlighetslov (Oslo:<br />

Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 2003)<br />

________, Ot prp nr 77 (1996-97) : Om lov om endringer i kringkastingsloven (Medieetikk<br />

mv) (Oslo: Statens Forvaltningstjeneste, 1997)<br />

________, St.prp. nr. 1 : (2003-2004) : for budsjetterminen 2004 (Oslo: Statens<br />

Forvaltningstjeneste, 2003)<br />

Supreme Court of Ug<strong>and</strong>a, judgement dated 11 th February, 2004, on an appeal in Monitor<br />

versus Constitutional Court, judgement published 21 st July, 2000. The judgement is<br />

published in full by The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), 1 st March,<br />

2004, pp. 8-10 <strong>and</strong> 16-17.<br />

UNESCO, World Communication <strong>and</strong> Information Report : 1999-2000 (Paris: UNESCO,<br />

1999)<br />

United Nations, “Joint Message for World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Day 3 May 2001”. A leaflet<br />

published by United Nations, UNESCO, <strong>and</strong> UN High Commissioner for Human<br />

Rights.<br />

________, Basic Facts About the United Nations (New York: United Nations, 2000)<br />

United States’ Department of Commerce, Globalization of the Mass Media (Washington:<br />

U.S. Department of Commerce, 1993)<br />

Private Institutional Documents<br />

Den norske Advokatforening, Norsk Retstidende : 2002 (Oslo: Den norske Advokatforening,<br />

2002), pp. 1202-1207 containing the Norwegian Supreme Court’s judgement<br />

number 00682 – 2002.<br />

<strong>International</strong> Crisis Group, Northern Ug<strong>and</strong>a : Underst<strong>and</strong>ing <strong>and</strong> solving the conflict, an<br />

<strong>International</strong> Crisis Group Report (Nairobi/Brussels: <strong>International</strong> Crisis Group,<br />

2004), ICG Africa Report Number 77, 14 th April, 2004.<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 10 Years IPI Headquarters in Vienna (Vienna: The<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003)<br />

________, 1950-2000 : <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong> (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Institute</strong>, 2000)<br />

________, Activity Report : May 2002 – May 2004 (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Institute</strong>, 2004)<br />

129


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

________, IPI – The First Ten Years : The Story of the <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong><br />

(Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1962)<br />

________, IPI Report 2003 : World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Review (Vienna: The <strong>International</strong><br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003)<br />

Media Council of Kenya, Code of Conduct <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism in Kenya : 2nd<br />

Edition (Nairobi: The Media Council of Kenya, 2004 [2002])<br />

________, Code of Conduct for Election Coverage (Nairobi: The Media Council of Kenya,<br />

2002)<br />

<strong>Press</strong>ens Faglige Utvalg [Norwegian Media Council], Oslo, judgements in case 117/2003.<br />

Parts: NN versus Agderposten (newspaper). Concluding date: 16 th December, 2003.<br />

The document is available in Norwegian in the council’s database:<br />

http://81.0.149.237/pfu/, downloaded 14 th February, 2005.<br />

________, judgements in case 118/2004. Parts: NN versus Verdens Gang (newspaper).<br />

Concluding date: 16 th December, 2003. Downloaded 14 th February, 2005.<br />

________, judgements in case 107/2004. Parts: NN <strong>and</strong> XX versus Nordlys (newspaper).<br />

Concluding date: 24 th August, 2004. Downloaded 14 th February, 2005.<br />

The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, Vær varsom : Etiske normer for pressen (Oslo, The<br />

Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association, 1999)<br />

Transparency <strong>International</strong> – Kenya, Lessons From the Fight Against Corruption (Nairobi:<br />

Transparency <strong>International</strong> – Kenya, 2001)<br />

Nation Media Group Limited, Annual Report & Accounts / Ripoti Na Hesabu 2003<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group, 2004)<br />

Memoirs<br />

Mboya, Tom, “Relations Between <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> Governments in Africa” in The Challenge of<br />

Nationhood : A collection of speeches <strong>and</strong> writings (Nairobi: East African<br />

Educational Publishers Ltd., 1993 [1970]), pp. 136-144.<br />

Nyerere, Julius K., ”The Arusha Declaration: Socialism <strong>and</strong> Self-Reliance” in <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

<strong>and</strong> Socialism : A Selection From Writings <strong>and</strong> Speeches 1965-1967 (Dar es<br />

Salaam/London: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 1968), chapter 26, pp. 231-250.<br />

Ochieng, Philip, I Accuse the <strong>Press</strong> : An Insider’s View of the Media <strong>and</strong> Politics in Africa<br />

(Nairobi: Initiatives Publishers, 1992)<br />

Published Secondary Sources<br />

Books<br />

Abuoga, John Baptist <strong>and</strong> Mutere, Absalom Aggrey, The History of the <strong>Press</strong> in Kenya<br />

(Nairobi: The African Council on Communication Education, 1988)<br />

Ahuja, B. N., Theory <strong>and</strong> Practice of Journalism : set to Indian context (Delhi: Surjeet<br />

Publications, 2004)<br />

Allan, Stuart, News Culture (Philadelphia: Open University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000 [1999])<br />

Altschull, J. Herbert, From Milton to McLuhan : The Ideas Behind American Journalism<br />

(New York: Longman, 1990)<br />

130


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Becker, Lee B., Vlad, Tudor <strong>and</strong> Nusser, Nancy, Measuring <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: A Technical<br />

Report (Athens, USA: Grady College of Journalism & Mass Communication,<br />

University of Georgia, 2004). Produced for the John S. <strong>and</strong> James L. Knight<br />

Foundation.<br />

p’Bitek, Okot, African Religions in Western Scholarship (Nairobi: Kenya Literature<br />

Bureau, 1970)<br />

Bourgault, Louise M., Mass Media in Sub-Saharan Africa (Indianapolis: Indiana<br />

University <strong>Press</strong>, 1995)<br />

Briggs, Adam <strong>and</strong> Cobley, Paul (eds.), The Media: An Introduction (Essex: Longman,<br />

1998)<br />

Browne, Stephen, Beyond Aid : From Patronage to Partnership (Aldershot: Ashgate, 1999)<br />

Carver, Richard, Coliver, S<strong>and</strong>ra, Lauriciano, Gil, Lush, David <strong>and</strong> Maja-Pearce, Adewale,<br />

Who Rules the Airwaves : Broadcasting in Africa (London: Article 19 <strong>and</strong> Index on<br />

Censorship, 1995)<br />

Coppard, Kit, IPI: The Defence of <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Institute</strong> : Part II: 1976-1988 (London/Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>,<br />

1988)<br />

Dunn, Kevin C, Imaging the Congo : the international relations of identity (New York:<br />

Palgrave Macmillan, 2003)<br />

Eggen, Kyrre, Ytringsfrihet : Vernet om ytringsfriheten i norsk rett (Oslo: Cappelen, 2002)<br />

Eide, Martin, Den redigerende makt : Redaktørrollens norske historie (Kristians<strong>and</strong>,<br />

Norway: IJ-forlaget, 2000)<br />

Elkins, Caroline, Britain’s Gulag : The Brutal End of Empire in Kenya (London: Jonathan<br />

Cape, 2005)<br />

Falk, Richard, Predatory Globalization : A Critique, (Cambridge: Polity <strong>Press</strong>, 1999)<br />

Gerbner, George, Mowlana, Hamid <strong>and</strong> Nordenstreng, Kaarle, The Global Media Debate :<br />

Its Rise, Fall, <strong>and</strong> Renewal (New Jersey: Ablex Publishing, 1993)<br />

van der Heijden, Barend <strong>and</strong> Tahzib-Lie, Bahia, Reflections in the Universal Declaration<br />

of Human Rights : A fiftieth Anniversary Anthology (The Hague: Martinius<br />

Nijhoff Publishers, 1998)<br />

Herbert, John, Practising Global Journalism : exploring reporting issues worldwide<br />

(Oxford: Focal <strong>Press</strong>, 2001)<br />

Herman, Edward S. <strong>and</strong> McChesney, Robert W., The Global Media : The New<br />

Missionaries of Corporate Capitalism (London: Continuum, 1997)<br />

Hiebert, Ray Eldon <strong>and</strong> Gibbons, Sheila Jean, Exploring Mass Media for a Changing<br />

World (London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1999)<br />

Joyrich, Lynne: Re-Viewing Reception : Television, Gender, <strong>and</strong> Postmodern Culture<br />

(Indianapolis: Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1996)<br />

Kemigisha, Rose Mary (ed.), The State of the Media in Ug<strong>and</strong>a (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />

Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Foundation, 1998)<br />

Keohane, Robert O. <strong>and</strong> Nye, Joseph S. Jr. (eds.), Transnational <strong>and</strong> World Politics<br />

(Boston: Harvard University <strong>Press</strong>, 1973 [1970])<br />

131


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Kilimwiko, Lawrence <strong>and</strong> Mapunda, Joseph (eds.), A h<strong>and</strong>book on the State of the Media<br />

in Tanzania (Dar es Salaam/Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong>, Friedrich Ebert<br />

Foundation, <strong>and</strong> Association of Journalists <strong>and</strong> Media Workers, 1998)<br />

Leaper, Glenn W., Löwstedt, Anthony <strong>and</strong> Madhoun, Husam, Caught in the Crossfire: The<br />

Iraq War <strong>and</strong> the Media – A Diary of Claims <strong>and</strong> Counterclaims (Vienna: The<br />

<strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 2003)<br />

Leggett, Ian, Ug<strong>and</strong>a : the background : the issues : the people : An Oxfam Country Profile<br />

(London: Oxfam/ Kampala: Fountain Publishers, 2001)<br />

Litvack, Jennie <strong>and</strong> Seddon, Jessica, Decentralization Briefing Notes (Washington: The<br />

World Bank <strong>Institute</strong>, 2000)<br />

Linard, André, Law <strong>and</strong> Ethics of the Media : Media Training in Africa (Nairobi: Paulines<br />

Publications, 2002)<br />

Loader, Brian D., The Governance of Cyberspace : Politics, Technology <strong>and</strong> Global<br />

Restructuring (London: Routledge, 1997)<br />

Makali, David (ed.), Media Law <strong>and</strong> Practice : The Kenyan Jurisprudence (Nairobi:<br />

Phoenix Publishers, 2003)<br />

Mallette, Malcolm F. (ed.), H<strong>and</strong>book for African Journalistis : With leaders in African<br />

journalism (Reston, USA: World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, 1996)<br />

Merrill, John C., Global Journalism : Survey of <strong>International</strong> Communication : third<br />

edition (New York: Longman Publishers, 1994)<br />

Miller, William L. (ed.), Alternatives to <strong>Freedom</strong> : arguments <strong>and</strong> opinions (New York:<br />

Longman, 1995)<br />

Mudimbe, V. Y., The Idea of Africa (Bloomington: Indiana University <strong>Press</strong>, 1994)<br />

Mytton, Graham, Mass Communication in Africa (London: Edward Arnold Publishers,<br />

1983)<br />

Parenti, Michael, Inventing Reality : The Politics of the Mass Media (New York: St.<br />

Martin’s <strong>Press</strong>, 1986)<br />

Petras, James <strong>and</strong> Veltmeyer, Henry, Globalization Unmasked : Imperialism in the 21st<br />

Century (London: Fernwood Publishing, 2001)<br />

Real, Michael R., Exploring Media Culture : A Guide (New Delhi: Sage Publications,<br />

1996)<br />

Retief, Johan, Media Ethics : An Introduction to Responsible Journalism (Oxford: Oxford<br />

University <strong>Press</strong>, 2002)<br />

Righter, Rosemary, IPI: The Undivided Word : A History of The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Institute</strong> : Part I: 1951-1976 (London/Zurich: The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>, 1988<br />

[1976])<br />

Ruggie, John Gerard, Constructing the World Polity : Essays on international<br />

institutionalization (London: Routledge, 2000 [1998])<br />

Ruud, Arild Engelsen, 1975-1989: Vekst, velvilje og utfordringer : Norsk utviklingshjelps<br />

historie 2 (Bergen, Norway: Fagbokforlaget, 2003)<br />

Sayer, Geoff, Kenya : the background : the issues : the people : An Oxfam Country Profile<br />

(Oxford: Oxfam, 2004 [1998])<br />

Siebert, Fred S., Peterson, Theodore <strong>and</strong> Schramm, Wilbur, Four Theories of the <strong>Press</strong><br />

(Illinois: Ayer Company Publishers, 2000 [1956])<br />

132


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Simensen, Jarle, 1952-1975: Norge møter den tredje verden : Norsk utviklingshjelps<br />

historie 1 (Bergen, Norway: Fagbokforlaget, 2003)<br />

Stephens, Mitchell, A History of News (Fort Worth, Texas: Harcourt Brace College<br />

Publishers, 1997)<br />

Thiong’o, Ngũgĩ wa, Moving the Centre : The Struggle for Cultural <strong>Freedom</strong>s (Nairobi:<br />

East African Educational Publishers, 1993)<br />

Tvedt, Terje, Utviklingshjelp, utenrikspolitikk og makt : Makt- og demokratiutredningen<br />

(Oslo: Gyldendal, 2003)<br />

Williams, Andrew, Failed imagination? : New world orders of the twentieth century<br />

(Manchester: Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>, 1998)<br />

World Bank, Globalization, Growth, <strong>and</strong> Poverty : Building an Inclusive World Economy<br />

(Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2002)<br />

Chapters in Books<br />

Abubakar, Dauda, “The Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Ideological Apparatuses in Post-Colonial Africa”<br />

in Domatob, Jerry, Jika, Abubakar <strong>and</strong> Nwosu, Ikechukwu (eds.), Mass Media <strong>and</strong><br />

the African Society (Nairobi: The African Council on Communication Education,<br />

1987), pp. 52-63.<br />

Ali, Owais Aslam, “Claiming that Differences in ‘Values’ Justify News Directions” in The<br />

World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, New Code Words For Censorship : Modern<br />

Labels for Curbs on the <strong>Press</strong> (Reston, USA: The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

Committee, 2002), pp. 71-81.<br />

An-na’im, Abdulla, “The <strong>Freedom</strong> of Expression as a Universal Human Right” in Willie<br />

Musarurwa Memorial Trust, Towards <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> (Harare, Zimbabwe: Willie<br />

Musarurwa Memorial Trust <strong>and</strong> Konrad Adenauer Stiftung, 1996), pp. 13-28.<br />

Aronson, Jonathan D., “The communications <strong>and</strong> Internet revolution” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong><br />

Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to<br />

international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp.<br />

540-558.<br />

Besley, Timothy, Burgess, Robin <strong>and</strong> Prat, Andrea, “Mass Media <strong>and</strong> Political<br />

Accountability” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in<br />

Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development<br />

Studies, 2002), pp. 45-60.<br />

Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi, “The Globalization of News” in Boyd-Barrett,<br />

Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The Globalization of News (New Delhi/London:<br />

Sage Publications, 1998), pp. 1-14.<br />

Boyd-Barrett, Oliver, “ ‘Global’ News Agencies” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen,<br />

Terhi (eds.), The Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage Publications,<br />

1998), pp. 19-34.<br />

Carrington, Tim <strong>and</strong> Nelson, Mark, “Media in Transition: The Hegemony of Economics”<br />

in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />

Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002),<br />

pp. 225-245.<br />

133


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Carruthers, Susan L., “<strong>International</strong> history 1900-1945” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve<br />

(eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to international<br />

relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 51-73.<br />

Chomsky, Noam, “United States <strong>and</strong> the challenge of relativity” in Evans, Tony (ed.),<br />

Human Rights Fifty Years On : A reappraisal (Manchester: Manchester University<br />

<strong>Press</strong>, 1998), pp. 24-56.<br />

Dahlgren, Peter, “Media <strong>and</strong> power transitions in a small country: Sweden” in Curran,<br />

James <strong>and</strong> Park, Myung-Jin, De-Westernizing Media Studies (London: Routledge,<br />

2000), pp. 251-264.<br />

Dunne, Tim: “Liberalism” in in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of<br />

World Politics : An introduction to international relations, second ed. (Oxford:<br />

Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 162-181.<br />

Dyck, Alex<strong>and</strong>er <strong>and</strong> Zingales, Luigi, “The Corporate Governance Role of the Media” in<br />

World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />

Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002),<br />

pp. 107-137.<br />

Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony, “The Media in Democratic <strong>and</strong> Nondemocratic<br />

Regimes: A Multilevel Perspective” in Gunther, Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony<br />

(eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A Comparative Perspective (Cambridge:<br />

Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp. 1-27.<br />

Halliday, Fred, “Nationalism” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization<br />

of World Politics : An introduction to international relations, second ed. (Oxford:<br />

Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 440-455.<br />

Herman, Edward S., “The Media <strong>and</strong> Markets in the United States” in World Bank, The<br />

Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington:<br />

The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 61-81.<br />

Hobden, Stephen <strong>and</strong> Jones, Richard Wyn, “Marxist theories of <strong>International</strong> Relations” in<br />

Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An<br />

introduction to international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>,<br />

2001), pp. 200-223.<br />

Hydén, Göran <strong>and</strong> Leslie, Michael, “Communications <strong>and</strong> Democratization in Africa” in<br />

Hydén, Göran, Leslie, Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F. (eds.), Media <strong>and</strong><br />

Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction Publishers, 2002), pp. 1-27.<br />

Islam, Roumeen, “Into the Looking Glass: What the Media Tell <strong>and</strong> Why – An Overview”<br />

in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />

Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002),<br />

pp. 1-23.<br />

Jackson, Robert H., “The evolution of international society” in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith,<br />

Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction to international<br />

relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp. 35-50.<br />

Kadhi, Joe S. M., “Anglophone Africa: Puppets of the proprietors?” in Kunczik, Michael<br />

(ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third World<br />

(Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-Stiftung, 1999), pp. 82-133.<br />

Karanja, Mugambi, “Growth of print media in Kenya” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru,<br />

Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />

Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 27-39.<br />

134


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Kivikuru, Ullamaija, “From State Socialism to Deregulation” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong><br />

Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage<br />

Publications, 1998), pp. 137-153.<br />

Krug, Peter <strong>and</strong> Price, Monroe E., “The Legal Environment for News Media” in in World<br />

Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development<br />

(Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 187-205.<br />

Kunczik, Michael, “Introduction: <strong>Freedom</strong> of the press – where to draw the line?”, in<br />

Kunczik, Michael (ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the<br />

Third World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-Stiftung, 1999) pp. 5-30.<br />

________, “Closing remarks: Is there an international ethics of journalism?”, in Kunczik,<br />

Michael (ed.), Ethics in Journalism : A Reader on Their Perception in the Third<br />

World (Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-Stiftung, 1999), pp. 245-268.<br />

Lamy, Steven L., “Contemporary mainstream approaches: neo-realism <strong>and</strong> neo-liberalism”<br />

in Baylis, John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An<br />

introduction to international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>,<br />

2001), pp. 182-199.<br />

Maloba, Wunyabari, “The Media <strong>and</strong> Mau Mau: Kenyan Nationalism <strong>and</strong> Colonial<br />

Propag<strong>and</strong>a” in Hawk, Beverly G. (ed.), Africa’s Media Image (Westport, USA:<br />

Praeger Publishers, 1992), pp. 51-61.<br />

Mbome, Peter H., “Aspects of Human Rights in an African Context” in Towards <strong>Press</strong><br />

<strong>Freedom</strong> (Harare, Zimbabwe: Willie Musarurwa Memorial Trust <strong>and</strong> Konrad<br />

Adenauer Stiftung, 1996), pp. 40-44.<br />

McGrew, Anthomy, “Human rights in a global age: coming to terms with globalisation” in<br />

Evans, Tony (ed.), Human Rights Fifty Years On : A reappraisal (Manchester:<br />

Manchester University <strong>Press</strong>, 1998), pp. 188-210.<br />

Moisy, Claude, ”Imposing Code of Ethics for Journalists : Less Innocent Than They Might<br />

Seem” in The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee, New Code Words For Censorship<br />

: Modern Labels for Curbs on the <strong>Press</strong> (Reston, USA: The World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong><br />

Committee, 2002), pp. 5-11.<br />

Munene, G. Macharia, “Historical Perspectives on Politics <strong>and</strong> Journalism” in Okigbo,<br />

Charles (ed.), Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council<br />

for Communication Education, 1994), pp. 42-52.<br />

Mute, Lawrence Murugu, “Media policy in Kenya” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther<br />

(eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media<br />

<strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 141-156.<br />

Nwosu, Ikechukwu, “An Overview of the Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the African Society” in<br />

Domatob, Jerry, Jika, Abubakar <strong>and</strong> Nwosu, Ikechukwu (eds.), Mass Media <strong>and</strong> the<br />

African Society (Nairobi: The African Council on Communication Education,<br />

1987), pp. 1-9.<br />

Ochilo, Polycarp Omolo, “Africa : Perspectives for Editorial Independence” in UNESCO,<br />

Public Service Broadcasting <strong>and</strong> Editorial Independence: Strengthening Democratic<br />

Voices (Helsinki, Finl<strong>and</strong>: The Finnish National Commission for UNESCO, 1998),<br />

pp. 41-49.<br />

Odero, Mitch, “<strong>Press</strong> in Kenya: an overview” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.),<br />

Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong><br />

<strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 11-25.<br />

135


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Ogbondah, Chris W., “Media Laws in Political Transition” in Hydén, Göran, Leslie,<br />

Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F. (eds.), Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Africa (New<br />

Jersey: Transaction Publishers, 2002), pp. 55-80.<br />

Ogundimu, Folu Folarin, “Media <strong>and</strong> Democracy in Twenty-First-Century Africa” in<br />

Hydén, Göran, Leslie, Michael <strong>and</strong> Ogundimu, Folu F. (eds.), Media <strong>and</strong><br />

Democracy in Africa (New Jersey: Transaction Publishers, 2002), pp. 207-238.<br />

Okello, Rosemary, “Media law past, present <strong>and</strong> future” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru,<br />

Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />

Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 157-169.<br />

Okolo, Dan Edogbo, “Agenda Setting Role of the Mass Media in Political Reporting” in<br />

Okigbo, Charles (ed.), Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African<br />

Council for Communication Education, 1994), pp. 31-41.<br />

Okonkwo, Ifeanyi Edward, “Journalists in a Developing Economy” in Okigbo, Charles<br />

(ed.), Reporting Politics <strong>and</strong> Public Affairs (Nairobi: The African Council for<br />

Communication Education, 1994), pp. 2-15.<br />

Omw<strong>and</strong>a, Lewis Odhiambo, “The mass media <strong>and</strong> democracy: Underst<strong>and</strong>ing the<br />

problem of objectivity in multicultural settings” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru,<br />

Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong> performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa<br />

Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 2000), pp. 203-224.<br />

________, “Values, st<strong>and</strong>ards <strong>and</strong> ethics in journalism: The way forward for sub-saharan<br />

Africa” in Odero, Mitch <strong>and</strong> Kamweru, Esther (eds.), Media culture <strong>and</strong><br />

performance in Kenya (Nairobi: Eastern Africa Media <strong>Institute</strong> <strong>and</strong> Friedrich Ebert<br />

Stiftung, 2000), pp. 171-189.<br />

Owen, Bruce M., “Media as Industry: Economic Foundations of Mass Communications” in<br />

World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic<br />

Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002),<br />

pp. 167-185.<br />

Paterson, Chris, “Global Battlefields” in Boyd-Barrett, Oliver <strong>and</strong> Rantanen, Terhi (eds.), The<br />

Globalization of News (New Delhi/London: Sage Publications, 1998), pp. 79-103.<br />

Patterson, Thomas E., “The United States: News in a Free-Market Society” in Gunther,<br />

Richard <strong>and</strong> Mughan, Anthony (eds.), Democracy <strong>and</strong> the Media : A Comparative<br />

Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2000), pp. 241-265.<br />

Porter, Michael E., “Competition in Global Industries: A Conceptual Framework” in<br />

Porter, Michael E. (ed.), Competition in Global Industries (Boston: Harvard<br />

Business School <strong>Press</strong>, 1986), pp. 1-59.<br />

Rothgeb, John M. Jr., “The Changing <strong>International</strong> Context for Foreign Policy” in Neack,<br />

Laura, Hey, Jeanne A. K. <strong>and</strong> Haney, Patrick J. (eds.), Foreign Policy Analysis :<br />

Continuity <strong>and</strong> Change in its Second Generation (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice<br />

Hall, 1995), pp. 33-48.<br />

Shiller, Robert J., “Irrational Exuberance in the Media” in World Bank, The Right To Tell<br />

: The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />

Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 83-93.<br />

Smith, Steve: “Reflectivist <strong>and</strong> constructivist approaches to international theory” in Baylis,<br />

John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction<br />

to international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp.<br />

224-249.<br />

136


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Stiglitz, Joseph, “Transparency in Government” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The<br />

Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The World<br />

Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 27-44.<br />

Strömberg, David, “Distributing News <strong>and</strong> Political Influence” in World Bank, The Right<br />

To Tell : The Role of Mass Media in Economic Development (Washington: The<br />

World Bank/WBI Development Studies, 2002), pp. 95-106.<br />

Walden, Ruth, “Insult Laws” in World Bank, The Right To Tell : The Role of Mass Media<br />

in Economic Development (Washington: The World Bank/WBI Development<br />

Studies, 2002), pp. 207-224.<br />

Wallerstein, Immanuel, “The inter-state structure of the modern world-system” in Smith,<br />

Steve, Booth, Ken, <strong>and</strong> Zalewski, Marysia (eds.), <strong>International</strong> theory: positivism<br />

<strong>and</strong> beyond (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 1996), pp. 87-107.<br />

Woods, Ngaire, “<strong>International</strong> political economy in an age of globalization” in Baylis,<br />

John <strong>and</strong> Smith, Steve (eds.), The Globalization of World Politics : An introduction<br />

to international relations, second ed. (Oxford: Oxford University <strong>Press</strong>, 2001), pp.<br />

277-298.<br />

Journal Articles<br />

Brislin, Tom, “Empowerment as a Universal Ethic in Global Journalism” in Journal of<br />

Mass Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004) volume 19,<br />

number 2-2004, pp. 130-137.<br />

Chomsky, Noam, “Commentary: moral truism, empirical evidence, <strong>and</strong> foreign policy” in<br />

Review of <strong>International</strong> Studies (Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003),<br />

volume 29, pp. 605-620.<br />

Christians, Clifford <strong>and</strong> Nordenstreng, Kaarle, “Social Responsibility Worldvide” in<br />

Journal of Mass Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004),<br />

volume 19, number 1, pp. 3-28.<br />

Elliott, Deni, “Terrorism, Global Journalism <strong>and</strong> the Myth of the Nation State” in Journal<br />

of Mass Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004), volume<br />

19, number 1, pp. 29-45.<br />

Habermas, Jürgen, “Toward a Cosmopolitian Europe” in Journal of Democracy<br />

(Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003), volume 14, number 4, pp.<br />

86-100.<br />

Herring, Eric <strong>and</strong> Robinson, Piers, “Too polemical or too critical? Chomsky on the study<br />

of the news media <strong>and</strong> US foreign policy” in Review of <strong>International</strong> Studies<br />

(Cambridge: Cambridge University <strong>Press</strong>, 2003), volume 29, pp. 553-568.<br />

Munene, G. Macharia, “The Colonial Policies of Segregating the Kikuyu, 1920 – 1964” in<br />

Chemchemi (Nairobi: Kenyatta University <strong>and</strong> Acacia Publishers), volume 2, 2002,<br />

number 1, pp. 36-48.<br />

Pol<strong>and</strong>, Kate, “Development Moments: Radio’s Public Face of Development” in Journal of<br />

<strong>International</strong> Development (West Sussex, UK: John Wiley & Sons, 2004) volume<br />

16, number 5, July 2004, pp. 705-715.<br />

Richardson, Brian, “The Public’s Right to Know: A Dangerous Notion” in Journal of Mass<br />

Media Ethics (New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 2004) volume 19,<br />

number 1-2004, pp. 46-55.<br />

137


Reference works<br />

<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Microsoft, Encarta Interactive World Atlas 2000 (Redmond, Washington: Microsoft,<br />

1999), CD-rom.<br />

Philip’s, Philip’s Encyclopedia : comprehensive edition (London: Philip’s, 2002)<br />

United Nations, Statistical Yearbook : Forty-fourth issue : 1997 (New York: United<br />

Nations, 2000)<br />

Unpublished Sources<br />

Conference Papers<br />

Getecha, Ciru, “Audit Public Leadership as a Way of Combating Graft”, paper presented at<br />

the ‘Eastern Africa <strong>International</strong> Conference on Media Fighting Corruption’, at<br />

United States <strong>International</strong> University (USIU), Nairobi, 30 th -31 st March, 2004.<br />

Getecha is Professor at USIU. E-mail: cgetecha@usiu.ac.ke<br />

Munene, Macharia, “Africans <strong>and</strong> Intellectual Adventurism: East African Intellectual<br />

Warriors”, paper presented in the University of Illinois NEH Seminar, African<br />

Studies in Africa, 11 th – 15 th November, 2002. Munene is Professor of History <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>International</strong> Relations at United States <strong>International</strong> University (USIU), Nairobi.<br />

E-mail: mmunene@usiu.ac.ke<br />

________, “Hazards of Postmodern Colonialism in Kenya”, Draft Paper prepared for<br />

Conference on ‘The Political Economy of Kenya’, Oxford University, 27th – 28th<br />

May, 2004, Oxford, United Kingdom.<br />

________, “The Media in Fighting Corruption: The Best Practice”, paper presented at the<br />

‘Eastern Africa <strong>International</strong> Conference on Media Fighting Corruption’, at United<br />

States <strong>International</strong> University (USIU), Nairobi, 30 th -31 st March, 2004.<br />

Correspondence, Interviews <strong>and</strong> Speeches<br />

Barth, Kodi, Lecturer of Journalism at USIU, Nairobi. Oral interview with him in his office<br />

at USIU, 1 st September, 2004, about the media in Kenya. E-mail:<br />

kbarth@usiu.ac.ke.<br />

Bäckl<strong>and</strong>er, Cecilia, Diplomat at the Swedish Embassy in Nairobi, correspondance by email<br />

in March, 2005. E-mail: cecilia@rosslyn.co.ke.<br />

Bratteli, Tone, Senior Advisor, The Norwegian Agency for Development Cooperation<br />

(NORAD). Correspondance by e-mail from January to March, 2005. E-mail:<br />

tone.bratteli@norad.no.<br />

Kadhi, Joe, notes from his address at the Media Council of Kenya’s public conferense on<br />

“Is There a Place for Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” at The Stanley Hotel,<br />

Nairobi, 1 st March, 2005. Kadhi is member of the Media Council of Kenya, <strong>and</strong><br />

Head of Extended Studies <strong>and</strong> Journalist in Residence at USIU, Nairobi.<br />

Kamweru, Esther, Executive Director of The Media Council of Kenya. Oral interview with<br />

her in her office in Nairobi, 10 th March, 2005, about the Media Council. E-mail:<br />

estherkamweru@yahoo.com.<br />

138


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Kilsved, Hans, Secretary-General of The Swedish Union of Journalists, correspondence by<br />

e-mail in March 2005, e-mail: hans.kilsved@sjf.se.<br />

Makunga, Theophil, Consulting Editor of Taifa Leo, Nation Media Group Ltd. in Kenya,<br />

e-mail: tmakunga@nation.co.ke. Former editor-in-chief of Majira <strong>and</strong> managing<br />

editor of Mwananchi, both Tanzanian newspapers. Oral interview with him at<br />

Nation Centre in Nairobi 1 st March, 2005, about press freedom in Tanzania.<br />

Muriuki, Muriithi, Political Reporter at Daily Nation/Sunday Nation in Kenya, e-mail:<br />

fmuriithi@nation.co.ke. Oral interview with him at Nation Centre in Nairobi, 7 th<br />

March, 2005, about freedom of accessing information.<br />

Odero, Mitch, notes from his closing address at Media Council of Kenya’s public<br />

conferense on “Is There a Place for Unethical Journalism in Kenya?” at The<br />

Stanley Hotel, Nairobi, 1st March, 2005. Odero is Chairman of Media Council of<br />

Kenya.<br />

Opanga, W. Kwendo, Executive Editor of The St<strong>and</strong>ard/Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard in Kenya, email:<br />

opashw@east<strong>and</strong>ard.net. Oral interview in his office in St<strong>and</strong>ard, 10 th April,<br />

2005, about media ownerships in Kenya.<br />

Olsen, Jahn-Arne, Secretary-General of The Norwegian Union of Journalists,<br />

correspondance by e-mail in March 2005, e-mail: nj@nj.no.<br />

Olweny, Joseph, Editorial Manager at Nation Media Group Ltd. Several conferences at Nation<br />

Centre in Nairobi from January to March, 2005, e.mail: olweny@nation.co.ke<br />

Onyango-Obbo, Charles, Managing Editor of Convergence <strong>and</strong> Syndication, Nation Media<br />

Group Ltd. in Kenya, e-mail: cobbo@nation.co.ke. Former Managing Editor of the<br />

newspaper The Monitor in Ug<strong>and</strong>a. Interview with him at Nation Centre in Nairobi<br />

21 st February, 2005, about press freedom in Ug<strong>and</strong>a.<br />

Øy, Nils, Secretary-General in the Association of Norwegian Editors, e-mail:<br />

nilsoy@online.no. Correspondance by e-mail from January to March 2005 about<br />

press freedom in Sc<strong>and</strong>inavia.<br />

Other Unpublished Documents<br />

Norad, “Medierapport fra Ug<strong>and</strong>a”, internal memo from Norad, Oslo, Norway, 12 th<br />

October, 2004, archive reference 842.0. E-mail: postmottak@norad.no.<br />

Internet Sources<br />

Dansk Journalistforbund: www.journalistforbundet.dk, Web site for The Danish Union of<br />

Journalists. Downloaded 11 th March, 2005.<br />

EthicNet: Databank for European Codes of Journalism Ethics: http://www.uta.fi/ethicnet/.<br />

Published on the web-site of: Department of Journalism <strong>and</strong> Mass Communication,<br />

University of Tampere, Finl<strong>and</strong>. The site contents codes of ethics for journalism for<br />

most of the European countries. Downloaded 22 nd July, 2004.<br />

Hoover’s Inc.: http://www.hoovers.com/. Hoover’s Inc. delivers comprehensive company,<br />

industry, <strong>and</strong> market intelligence. The database consist of 12 million companies,<br />

with in-depth coverage of 40,000 of the world’s top business enterprises. Actual<br />

companies searched 12 th January, 2005.<br />

Norsk <strong>Press</strong>eforbund: http://www.presse.no/, Web site for The Norwegian <strong>Press</strong><br />

Association. Subpage http://81.0.149.237/pfu/ include judgements from the<br />

139


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Norwegian Media Council which is conducted by the Norwegian <strong>Press</strong> Association,<br />

actual judgements downloaded 14 th February, 2005.<br />

Norsk Redaktørforening [The Association of Norwegian Editors]: www.nored.no. The<br />

declaration “Redaktørplakaten” is a joint document between The Association of<br />

Norwegian Editors <strong>and</strong> Norwegian Media Business Association, downloaded 10 th<br />

February, 2005.<br />

The <strong>International</strong> <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Institute</strong>: www.freemedia.at, Web site for IPI. Homepage <strong>and</strong><br />

subpages downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />

The Norwegian Government, “Straffeprosessloven”. This law on criminal procedure is<br />

available on: http://www.lovdata.no/all/nl-19810522-025.html, downloaded 28 th<br />

March, 2005.<br />

The World Bank’s statistical database: http://www.worldbank.org/data. World<br />

Development Indicators database: http://devdata.worldbank.org/data-query/. Search<br />

downloaded 20 th December, 2004.<br />

World <strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> Committee: http://www.wpfc.org. Web site for WPFC, an umbrella<br />

organisation of 45 affiliates (national og international organisations) concerned<br />

with press freedom. Homepage <strong>and</strong> subpages downloaded 28 th March, 2005.<br />

Newspaper <strong>and</strong> Magazine Articles<br />

Abdallah, Halima, “ ‘Monitor’ journalists win case over chopper report” in Daily Nation<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 1 st April, 2004.<br />

Barth, Kodi, “The laws needed for those with cameras” in The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi:<br />

The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), commentary, 6 th March, 2005.<br />

Bindra, Sunny, “The real achievement of 2003 is an open society” in Sunday Nation<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 21 st December, 2003.<br />

Daily Nation, “Boy, 10, kills himself after book row with mother” in Daily Nation<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 27 th January, 2005.<br />

________, “Government set to review press laws, says Kiraitu” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), news article, 5 th April, 2004.<br />

________, “ ‘Nation’ writer’s ordeal at GSU officer’s home” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), news article, 24 th February, 2005.<br />

________, “Narc won’t cow the press” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group),<br />

editorial, 13 th January, 2005.<br />

________, “Tuju’s order to censor broadcasts ‘is illegal’ ” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), news article, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />

________, “They want to kill Kiss FM, says Kalonzo” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />

Media Group), news article, 20 th April, 2004.<br />

Eikje, Ove, “God journalistikk er en vaktbikkje” in Dagen (Bergen, Norway: Dagbladet<br />

Dagen), news article, 18 th February, 2004.<br />

Godbole, Madhav, “Good Governance: A Distant Dream” (commentary) in Economic <strong>and</strong><br />

Political Weekly (Mumbai: Sameeksha Trust, 2004), volume XXXIX, number 11,<br />

13 th March, 2004, pp. 1103-1107.<br />

Journalisten, “<strong>Press</strong>estøtten kuttes fem prosent” in Journalisten (Oslo: Norsk Journalistlag),<br />

news article, 11 th May, 2004.<br />

140


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Kadida, Jillo, “Editor <strong>and</strong> CID officer on theft charge” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />

Media Group), news article, 2 nd October, 2003.<br />

Kago, Tony <strong>and</strong> Kadida, Jillo, “State drops libel case : Outdated law will never be used<br />

again, says Wako” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article,<br />

21 st January, 2005.<br />

Kamau, John, “How Kenyatte gagged the press to manage the Mboya crisis” in Sunday<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 25 th April, 2004.<br />

________, “When You Had to Shut up or Languish in Prison for Years” in Media Review,<br />

a pull-out in eXpression today (Nairobi: The Media <strong>Institute</strong>), May 1999, p. 38-41.<br />

Lehihi, Masego, “Broadcast Headaches” in Business in Africa (Rivonia, South Africa:<br />

Business in Africa Group, 2004), news article, June 2004, pp. 24-25.<br />

Makali, David, “Progress <strong>and</strong> Problems in Freeing Kenya’s Airwaves” in Media Review,<br />

a pull-out in eXpression today (Nairobi: The Media <strong>Institute</strong>), May 1999, p. 13-14<br />

<strong>and</strong> 18.<br />

Mkapa, Benjamin <strong>and</strong> Halonen, Tarja, “<strong>Globalisation</strong> Can Work, the Question is: How?”<br />

in The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 15 th March,<br />

2004.<br />

Mudi, Maureen, “Girl, 4, is rescued by police after rape ordeal” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi:<br />

The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 15 th January, 2005.<br />

Mungai, Kibe, “Balanced justice” in The Sunday St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.),<br />

commentary, 10 th April, 2005.<br />

Murimi, Joseph, “ ‘St<strong>and</strong>ard’ writer faces libel charge” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 14 th January, 2005.<br />

Musoke, David, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Publishers Right to Information Bill” in The East African<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 19 th April, 2004.<br />

Mwaura, Peter, “Criminal libel: AG missed the real issue” in Daily Nation (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), commentary, 22 nd January, 2005.<br />

Nakkazi, Esther, “Ug<strong>and</strong>a Cracks Down on Radio, TV Stations” in The East African<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 12 th January, 2004.<br />

Ngari, Johnson L., “<strong>Freedom</strong> of the <strong>Press</strong> <strong>and</strong> its responsibility” in East African St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />

(Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), commentary, 27 th April, 2004.<br />

Ngotho, Kamau, “Mr Moneybags : EXCLUSIVE: In Kenya, politics <strong>and</strong> high finance are<br />

two sides of the same coin. And the game is played by the same people” in The<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 8 th January, 2005.<br />

Ogutu, Judy, “Mwau seeks orders to bar ‘The St<strong>and</strong>ard’ ” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />

Oloo, J. B., “Why media freedom is so vital” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media<br />

Group), reader’s letter, 21 st December, 2003.<br />

Oluoch, Fred, “Is <strong>Globalisation</strong> Eroding Our Culture?” in The East African (Nairobi:<br />

Nation Media Group), news article, 29 th December, 2003.<br />

Omdal, Sven Egil, “Menn som slår, kommer i avisen” in Stavanger Aftenblad (Stavanger,<br />

Norway: Stavanger Aftenblad), commentary, 15 th January, 2005. The article is also<br />

published at: http://web3.aftenbladet.no/debatt/medieblikk/article169781.ece,<br />

downloaded 25 th January, 2005.<br />

141


<strong>Press</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>Globalisation</strong><br />

Onyango-Obbo, Charles, “Ah, Ug<strong>and</strong>a’s <strong>Press</strong>: So Free, So Terrorised” in The East African<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 5 th April, 2004.<br />

________, “Ug<strong>and</strong>ans like dirty pictures, so why faint at the V-word?” in The East African<br />

(Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 28 th February, 2005.<br />

Savio, Roberto, “New Information Order Leading Towards ‘Unthink’ ” in The East<br />

African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), commentary, 19 th April, 2004.<br />

Shikwati, James, “It’s a potential threat to <strong>Press</strong> freedom” in Daily Nation (Nairobi: Nation<br />

Media Group), commentary, 22 nd April, 2004.<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Team, “Outrage by donors over press harassment” in The St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 13 th January, 2005.<br />

Suri, Sanjay, “How IMF, World Bank Brought Down Zambian Economy” in The East<br />

African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 7 th June, 2004.<br />

The East African, “Media <strong>and</strong> <strong>Freedom</strong>: Ug<strong>and</strong>a Supreme Court Kicks Out Colonial Law”<br />

in The East African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), 1 st March, 2004. This is an<br />

introduction article to the whole judgement of Supreme Court, see ‘Documents’<br />

below.<br />

The Kenyan Government, “Why Mwai Kibaki does not speak out on everything” in Daily<br />

Nation (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), advertisement, 2 nd March, 2005.<br />

The Media Council of Tanzania, “Norwegian Embassy donates 24 m/- for WAPC<br />

conference” in Media Watch (Dar es Salaam: The Media Council of Tanzania,<br />

2004), number 56, August 2004.<br />

________, “SIDA okays 47 m/- for starting centre for training of journos” in Media Watch<br />

(Dar es Salaam: The Media Council of Tanzania, 2004), number 57, September<br />

2004.<br />

________, “Supporters of the WAPC conference in Bagamoyo” in Media Watch (Dar es<br />

Salaam: The Media Council of Tanzania, 2004), number 59, November 2004.<br />

Wachira, Nick, “The unlikely media mogul : Will Citizen rule the airwaves?” in The<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard (Nairobi: The St<strong>and</strong>ard Ltd.), news article, 22 nd March, 2005.<br />

Wakabi, Wairagala, “Kenya <strong>and</strong> Ug<strong>and</strong>a Still Have Though <strong>Press</strong> Laws” in The East<br />

African (Nairobi: Nation Media Group), news article, 19 th April, 2004.<br />

142

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!